Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,
and save this manual for future use.
Owner’s Manual
for advanced features
Digital Camera
Model No. DC-G9
DVQP1402ZA
F1217HN0
Message Display P321
Troubleshooting P323
Finding the information you need P2
Contents P4
Contents by Function P10
Menu list P184
Register online at http://shop.panasonic.com/support
(U.S. customers only)
2
Finding the information you need
In this “Owner’s Manual for advanced features”, you can find the information you need
from the following pages.
By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the
information.
Search from “Contents”
Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.
P4
Search from the list of function names P10
Search from the list of buttons and dials P16
Search from the list of screens and icons P313
Search from “Message Display” P321
Search from “Menu list”
Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.
P184
Search from “Troubleshooting” P323
Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.
Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.
3
How to use this manual
∫ About the symbols in the text
• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.
• Description in this owner’s manual is based on the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060).
About the indication of the applicable mode
Applicable modes:
The icons indicate the modes available for a function.
• Black icons: Applicable modes
• Gray icons: Unavailable modes
, and will differ depending on the Recording Modes registered under
custom settings.
: Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.
: Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.
: Tips for skillful use and points for recording.
: Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.
In this owner’s manual, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows.
Example: In the [Rec] menu, change [Quality] from [
A] to [›]
> [Rec] > [Quality] > [›]
MENU
Wi-Fi
MENU
4
Contents
Finding the information you need..............................................................................2
How to use this manual.............................................................................................3
Contents by Function ..............................................................................................10
1. Before Use
Care of the camera .................................................................................................13
Standard Accessories .............................................................................................15
Names and Functions of Components....................................................................16
About the Lens........................................................................................................19
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................................................................................20
Charging the Battery ...............................................................................................21
• Charging the battery with the charger ............................................................21
• Inserting/Removing the Battery ......................................................................23
• Charging the battery with the camera ............................................................24
• Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures....................27
Inserting/Removing the Card (Optional)..................................................................29
Card Information .....................................................................................................30
• Formatting the card (initialization) ..................................................................31
• Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording time ....31
Attaching/Removing the Lens .................................................................................33
Opening the Monitor ...............................................................................................37
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set).................................................................................38
Basic Operations.....................................................................................................40
• Tips for taking good pictures ..........................................................................40
• Turn on the status LCD backlight ...................................................................40
• Using the Viewfinder.......................................................................................41
• Shutter button (Taking pictures) .....................................................................42
• Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures).........................................43
• Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode) .......................................................43
• Front Dial/Rear Dial........................................................................................44
• Control Dial.....................................................................................................46
• Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button ...............................................................47
• Joystick...........................................................................................................48
• Function lever.................................................................................................48
• [DISP.] button (Switching the displayed information)......................................49
• Touch screen (Touch operations) ...................................................................52
• Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function .....................................................53
Setting menu items .................................................................................................55
Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)...........................................58
• Customizing the Quick Menu settings ............................................................59
5
Assigning Frequently-Used Functions to Buttons/Lever
(Function Buttons/Function Lever)..........................................................................60
• Assigning functions to function buttons ..........................................................60
• Using the function buttons during recording ...................................................61
• Using the function buttons during playback....................................................62
• Assigning a function to the function lever.......................................................63
Entering Text ...........................................................................................................64
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function (Intelligent Auto Mode) ...................65
• [Intelligent Auto] menu....................................................................................68
• Taking pictures with customized color, defocus control, and brightness
settings...........................................................................................................69
Taking Pictures with Automatically Adjusted Aperture and Shutter Speed
(Program AE Mode) ................................................................................................71
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/Shutter Speed.....................................73
• Aperture-Priority AE Mode .............................................................................74
• Shutter-Priority AE Mode................................................................................74
• Manual Exposure Mode .................................................................................75
• Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed (Preview Mode) .............77
• Easily set aperture/shutter speed for suitable exposure (One Push AE) .......78
Taking Pictures with different image effects (Creative Control Mode).....................79
• Types of image effects....................................................................................80
Registering your preferred settings (Custom Mode) ...............................................85
• Registering Personal Menu Settings (Registering custom settings) ..............85
• Calling up a registered set of custom settings................................................86
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Adjusting Focus Automatically ................................................................................87
Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)................................................................89
• Customizing the operation settings of Auto Focus for picture taking..............90
Setting the Auto Focus Mode..................................................................................92
Specifying the AF area position ..............................................................................97
• Specifying the AF area position on the setting screen ...................................98
• Specifying the AF area position with the joystick..........................................100
• Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad ....................................101
• Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Function .............................101
Adjusting Focus Manually .....................................................................................103
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ................................................106
Compensating the Exposure.................................................................................107
Setting the Light Sensitivity...................................................................................109
Adjusting the White Balance ................................................................................. 111
• Finely adjusting the White Balance ..............................................................113
6
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Select a Drive Mode..............................................................................................114
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode......................................................................... 115
Recording 6K/4K Photos.......................................................................................119
• Notes on the 6K/4K Photo function ..............................................................122
Selecting pictures from 6K/4K burst file and saving..............................................125
• Correcting 6K/4K Photos After Recording (Post-Recording Refinement) ....126
• Operations during selecting pictures ............................................................127
Controlling Focus After Recording (Post Focus/Focus Stacking) .........................130
• Selecting the desired focus area and saving a picture .................................132
• Merging multiple pictures to widen the focus range (Focus Stacking)..........133
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer........................................................................135
Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/Stop Motion Animation .............................136
• Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals ([Time Lapse Shot]) .............137
• Creating Stop Motion Pictures ([Stop Motion Animation]) ............................138
• Creating motion pictures from recorded pictures .........................................140
Taking Pictures While Adjusting a Setting Automatically (Bracket Recording) .....141
• Exposure Bracket .........................................................................................142
• Aperture Bracket ..........................................................................................143
• Focus Bracket ..............................................................................................143
• White Balance Bracket .................................................................................144
• White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) ................................................144
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Image Stabilizer.....................................................................................................145
• Setting the focal length of a lens ..................................................................147
Taking Pictures with the Zoom ..............................................................................149
• Optical zoom ................................................................................................149
• Raising the telescopic effect.........................................................................150
• Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom) ...........................................154
Taking Pictures with the External Flash (Optional)................................................155
Setting the Flash Functions ..................................................................................157
• Changing the firing mode .............................................................................157
• Changing Flash Mode ..................................................................................158
• Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro...............................................................159
• Adjust the flash output..................................................................................160
• Synchronizing the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation .........160
Taking Pictures with Wireless Flashes..................................................................161
• Using other settings for wireless flash recording ..........................................163
7
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture......................................................................................164
• Setting the format, size and frame rate ........................................................166
• How to set focus when recording a motion picture ([Continuous AF]) .........167
• Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures...............................168
• Displaying/setting the sound input level .......................................................169
• Recording images with superimposed recording dates
([Time Stamp Rec]) ......................................................................................170
Recording Motion Pictures in Creative Video Mode..............................................171
• Recording slow motion pictures (High Speed Video) ...................................173
• Recording Motion Pictures that Pan and Zoom While Maintaining a Fixed
Camera Position ([4K Live Cropping])..........................................................174
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures ...........................................................................................176
Playing Back Motion Pictures................................................................................177
• Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture ................................................178
Switching the Playback Method ............................................................................179
• Using the Playback Zoom ............................................................................179
• Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback) ...............................................180
• Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback) ......................180
Playing Back Group Pictures ................................................................................181
Deleting Pictures...................................................................................................183
9. Using Menu Functions
Menu list................................................................................................................184
• Menus that are only available for particular Recording Modes.....................184
• [Rec] menu ...................................................................................................185
• [Motion Picture] menu ..................................................................................203
• [Custom] menu .............................................................................................206
• [Setup] menu ................................................................................................220
• [My Menu] menu...........................................................................................232
• [Playback] menu...........................................................................................233
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
What you can do with the Wi-Fi
®
/Bluetooth
®
function ...........................................250
Wi-Fi function/Bluetooth function ..........................................................................251
Connecting to a smartphone/tablet .......................................................................253
• Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Image App” .......................................253
• Using a smartphones that supports Bluetooth low energy ...........................254
• Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth low energy ................256
• Changing the Wi-Fi connection method .......................................................258
• Terminating the Wi-Fi connection .................................................................259
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet ...................................................................260
8
• Turning on/off the camera with a smartphone ..............................................260
• Taking images via a smartphone (remote recording) ...................................261
• Operating the shutter button with a smartphone via a Bluetooth
connection alone ..........................................................................................262
• Playing back/saving images stored on the camera, or uploading them on
social media sites.........................................................................................263
• Transferring recorded images to a smartphone automatically .....................264
• Backing up images to a Cloud Storage automatically
(Auto Cloud Backup) ....................................................................................265
• Recording location information to the camera’s images...............................268
• Synchronizing the camera’s clock with a smartphone..................................269
• Saving the camera’s setup information to a smartphone .............................269
Displaying pictures on a TV ..................................................................................270
Sending images ....................................................................................................271
Sending images to a smartphone/tablet................................................................273
Printing Wirelessly.................................................................................................274
Sending images to AV device ...............................................................................275
Sending images to PC ..........................................................................................276
Using Web services ..............................................................................................278
• When sending images to web service..........................................................278
• When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........................................281
• About the [LUMIX CLUB] .............................................................................282
About Wi-Fi connections .......................................................................................285
• Connecting via a wireless access point (via the network) ............................286
• Connecting the camera and another device directly (direct connection)......288
• Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones
([Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]) ....289
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ...............................................................................................291
11. Connecting to other equipment
Watching/Saving 4K Motion Pictures on an External Device................................293
• Watching motion pictures in 4K ....................................................................293
• Storing 4K motion pictures ...........................................................................293
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .................................................................294
• Recording while monitoring camera images ................................................295
• Using VIERA Link (HDMI) ............................................................................297
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on your PC ............................................298
• Downloading software ..................................................................................299
• Transferring images to a PC.........................................................................301
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a Recorder .......................................303
Controlling the Camera from a PC ........................................................................304
Printing the Pictures..............................................................................................306
9
12. Others
Optional accessories.............................................................................................309
Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display.......................................................................313
Status LCD Indications..........................................................................................319
Message Display...................................................................................................321
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................323
Cautions for Use ...................................................................................................332
10
Contents by Function
Recording
Recording Mode ..............................
P43
[Preview]..........................................P77
[Time Lapse Shot] .........................P137
[Stop Motion Animation] ................P138
Aperture Bracket ...........................P143
Focus Bracket ...............................P143
[High Resolution Mode] .................P196
[Silent Mode] .................................P198
[Multi Exp.].....................................P202
6K/4K photo
[6K/4K PHOTO].............................
P119
[Reduce Rolling Shutter] ...............P126
[6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]....P126
[Post Focus] ..................................P130
Focus (AF/MF)
[Focus Mode]...................................
P89
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ........... P90
[AF Mode]........................................P92
Adjusting the AF area position ........ P97
Manual Focus................................P103
[AF/AE Lock] .................................P106
[AF-Point Scope Setting] .................P94
Drive
[Drive Mode] ..................................P114
[Burst] ............................................P115
[Self Timer] .................................... P135
Picture Quality and Color Tone
[Sensitivity].....................................
P109
[White Balance]..............................P111
[Picture Size]..................................P186
[Quality]..........................................P187
[Photo Style] ..................................P188
[Filter Settings]...............................P190
[Color Space] .................................P191
[Highlight Shadow].........................P192
[i.Dynamic] .....................................P193
[i.Resolution]..................................P193
[Long Shtr NR] ...............................P195
[Shading Comp.] ............................P195
[Diffraction Compensation] ............P196
[HDR] .............................................P201
Exposure
[Touch AE] .......................................P54
[One Push AE] .................................P78
[AF/AE Lock]..................................P106
Exposure Compensation ...............P107
Exposure Bracket ..........................P142
[Metering Mode].............................P192
Stabilizer
Dual I.S. .........................................P145
5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer.......P146
Flash
[Flash Mode] ..................................
P158
2nd curtain synchro .......................
P159
[
Flash Adjust.] ................................
P160
Wireless flash settings...................P161
Recording
11
Motion Picture
[Rec Quality]..................................P166
Recording still pictures while
recording motion pictures ..............
P168
Creative Video Mode
[High Speed Video] .......................P173
[4K Live Cropping].........................P174
Audio
[Mic Level Adj.] ..............................
P169
[Mic Level Limiter] .........................P169
[Wind Cut]......................................P312
[Wind Noise Canceller] ..................P204
[Lens Noise Cut] ............................P204
Monitoring
[Sound Output]...............................
P205
Screen settings
[Mic Level Disp.] ............................
P169
[Monochrome Live View] ...............P212
[Center Marker]..............................P214
[Zebra Pattern]...............................P214
Advanced recording and settings
[Time Stamp Rec] ..........................P170
Basic settings
[Format] ...........................................
P31
[Clock Set] .......................................P38
[Q.MENU] ........................................P58
[Beep] ............................................P222
[Economy] .....................................P223
[Double Slot Function] ...................P229
[Reset] (initialization) ..................... P231
[Sensor Cleaning].......................... P231
Customization
Function buttons ..............................
P60
Function lever ..................................P63
Custom Mode ..................................P85
[Custom] menu ..............................P206
Motion Picture
Setup/Custom
12
Playback
Picture playback ............................P176
Motion picture playback.................P177
Playback Zoom.............................. P179
Multi Playback ...............................P180
Delete ............................................ P183
[Auto Review] ................................ P212
[Slide Show] .................................. P234
[Rotate]..........................................P247
Edit
[6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] .........P126
Focus Stacking ..............................P133
[RAW Processing]..........................P238
[Light Composition] ........................P241
[Clear Retouch]..............................P242
[Resize]..........................................P245
[Cropping] ......................................P246
[Title Edit].......................................P237
[Text Stamp] ..................................P243
Image settings
[Protect] .........................................P236
[Rating] ..........................................P236
Image App
“Image App” ..................................
P253
[Remote Wakeup]......................... P260
Remote recording..........................P261
[Auto Transfer].............................. P264
Auto Cloud Backup....................... P265
In combination with other devices
Playing back pictures on a TV .......
P270
Printing images ..............................P274
Sending images to an AV
device ............................................
P275
Sending images to a PC ................P276
Sending images to a web
service ...........................................
P278
Using [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........P281
PC
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO” ....................
P299
“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” .......P300
Transferring images to a PC .........P276
“LUMIX Tether” ...............................P304
Controlling the Camera from a
PC .................................................
P304
TV
Playing Back Pictures on a TV
Screen ...........................................
P294
[VIERA Link] ..................................P297
Recorder
Dubbing .........................................
P303
Printer
PictBridge ......................................P306
Playback
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Connections with other devices
13
1. Before Use
Care of the camera
Do not subject to strong vibration, shock, or pressure.
• The lens, monitor, or external case may be damaged if used in the following conditions.
It may also malfunction or image may not be recorded if you:
– Drop or hit the camera.
– Press hard on the lens or the monitor.
∫ Splash Proof
Splash Proof is a term used to describe an extra level of protection this camera offers
against exposure to a minimal amount of moisture, water or dust. Splash Proof does not
guarantee that damage will not occur if this camera is subjected to direct contact with
water.
In order to minimize the possibility of damage please be sure the following precautions are
taken:
– The Splash Proof feature works in conjunction with the lenses that were specifically designed
to support this feature.
– The camera is not designed to be dust and splash proof when the USB connection cable is
connected.
– Make sure that all doors, socket caps and terminal covers are securely closed.
– Make sure that you are in a dry and secure place when changing the battery, lens or memory
card. After changing, make sure their protective doors are securely closed.
– If this camera is exposed to water, sand or any other foreign material clean it as soon as
possible, taking the necessary precautions that the foreign substance does not get inside the
camera.
If sand, dust, or liquids such as water droplets adhere to the monitor, wipe them off with a
dry soft cloth.
– Not doing so may cause the monitor to respond incorrectly to touch operations.
– If the monitor is closed when such liquids are present, malfunction may result.
When using in cold temperatures (s10 oC to 0 oC (14 oF to 32 oF)):
– Attach a Panasonic interchangeable lens with a minimum recommended operating
temperature of s10 oC (14 oF) before use.
Do not place your hands inside the mount of the digital camera body. Since the
sensor unit is a precision apparatus, it may cause a malfunction or damage.
If you shake the camera while it is turned off, its sensors may move or a rattling sound
may be heard. The sound is caused by the In-Body Image Stabilizer, and this is not a
malfunction.
1. Before Use
14
∫ About Condensation (When the lens, the viewfinder or monitor is fogged up)
• Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity changes. Be careful of
condensation since it causes lens, viewfinder and monitor stains, fungus and camera
malfunction.
• If condensation occurs, turn the camera off and leave it for about 2 hours. The fog will
disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient
temperature.
15
1. Before Use
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.
• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera
was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Owner’s Manual”.
• Digital Camera Body is indicated as camera body in the text.
• Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.
• Battery Charger is indicated as battery charger or charger in the text.
• AC Adaptor is indicated as AC adaptor (supplied) in the text.
• USB Connection Cable (for exclusive use with the Battery Charger) is indicated as USB
connection cable (for charger) in the text.
(P21)
• Interchangeable Lens is indicated as lens in the text.
• SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the
text.
• The card is optional.
1. Before Use
16
Names and Functions of Components
∫ Camera body
30 2933 3132
10
25
28
15
14
13
7
9
11
12
8
26
24
23
27
20
18
19
1
4
2
322 5 6
22
17
16
21
1
Charging lamp
(P24)/
WIRELESS connection lamp
(P251)
2
Motion picture button
(P164)
3
Focus distance reference mark
(P105)
4
[ ] (Exposure Compensation) button
(P107)
5
[ ] (ISO sensitivity) button (P109)
6
[ ] (White Balance) button (P111)
7
Front dial
(P44)
8
Shutter button
(P42)
9
Camera ON/OFF switch
(P38)/
Status LCD backlight dial
(P40, 225)
10
Self-timer indicator
(P135)/
AF Assist Lamp
(P208)
11
Function button (Fn4)
(P60)
12
Preview button
(P77)/Function button (Fn5)
(P60)
13
Rear dial
(P44)
14
Status LCD (P225, 319)
15
Stereo microphone
(P169)
• Be careful not to cover the microphone with
your finger. Doing so may make sound difficult
to record.
16
Hot shoe (Hot shoe cover) (P155)
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of
children to prevent swallowing.
17
Mode dial
(P43)
18
Mode dial lock button (P43)
19
Drive mode dial
(P114)
20
Flash synchro socket
(Flash synchro socket cap)
(P156)
21
[V.MODE] button (P41)
22
Shoulder strap eyelet
(P20)
23
Diopter adjustment dial
(P41)
24
[MIC] socket
(P311)
25
Headphone socket (P205)
26
[HDMI] socket
(P294)
27
[USB/CHARGE] socket
(P301, 306)
28
Lens release button
(P34)
29
Function lever
(P48)
30
Lens lock pin
31
Mount
32
Sensor
33
Lens fitting mark
(P33)
17
1. Before Use
• Function buttons ([Fn6] to [Fn10]) are
touch icons.
Touch the [ ] tab on the recording screen to
display them.
45
46
47
48
50
49
34
51
38 39
58
5455
36
35
44
43
52
53
37 4140
42
57 56
34
Touch screen
(P52)/monitor (P313)
35
[(] (Playback) button
(P176)
36
[LVF] button (P41)/[Fn3] button (P60)
37
Eye sensor (P41)
38
Viewfinder
(P41)
39
Eye cup (P334)
40
Speaker
(P222)
41
Joystick
(P48)/Function button (P60)
Center (Fn11)/3 (Fn12)/1 (Fn13)/4 (Fn14)/
2 (Fn15)
42
[ ] (Auto Focus Mode) button (P92)/
[Fn1] button
(P60)
43
[AF/AE LOCK] button
(P106)
44
Focus mode lever
(P87, 103)
45
[REMOTE] socket
(P310)
46
Cursor buttons
(P47)/Function button (P60)
3 (Fn16)/1 (Fn17)/4 (Fn18)/2 (Fn19)
47
Control dial (P46)
48
[MENU/SET] button
(P47, 55)
49
Card slot 1
(P29)
50
Card slot 2
(P29)
51
Card door
(P29)
52
[Q.MENU] button
(P58)/[Fn2] button (P60)/
[ ] (Delete) button
(P183)/[ ] (Cancel)
button
(P57)
53
[DISP.] button
(P49)
54
Release lever
(P23)
55
Battery door
(P23)
56
DC coupler cover
(P312)
• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the
Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and AC
adaptor (optional) are used.
57
Cover for the battery grip connector (P309)
• Keep the cover for the battery grip connector
out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
58
Tripod mount
(P338)
• It may not be possible to attach and securely
fasten a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm
(0.22 inch) or more to the camera. Doing so
may also damage the camera.
1. Before Use
18
∫ Lens
H-ES12060 H-FS12060
123 6 85 74
23 6 781
1
Lens surface
2
Focus ring
(P103)
3
Zoom ring
(P149)
4
O.I.S. switch
(P145)
5
[AF/MF] switch
• When either the [AF/MF] switch of the lens or the
setting of the camera is set to [MF], Manual
Focus (MF) is enabled.
6
Contact point
7
Lens mount rubber
(P335)
8
Lens fitting mark
(P33)
19
1. Before Use
About the Lens
This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with
the Micro Four Thirds
TM
System lens mount specification
(Micro Four Thirds mount).
You can also use a lens of any of the following
standards by attaching a mount adaptor.
∫ About the lens and functions
Depending on the lens used, certain functions, such as Auto Focus, Image Stabilizer, and
zoom functions, may be disabled or operate differently.
For details on the lens used, refer to the website.
∫ About the firmware of your interchangeable lens
For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the interchangeable lens
to the latest version.
• To view the latest information on the firmware or to download the firmware, visit the
support site below:
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• To check the firmware version of the interchangeable lens, attach it to the camera body and
select [Version Disp.] in the [Setup] menu.
Lens Mount adaptor
Four Thirds™ mount specification
lens
Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA1: optional)
Leica M Mount interchangeable lens M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional)
Leica R Mount interchangeable lens R Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA3R: optional)
Refer to catalogs/Web pages for most current information regarding compatible lenses.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• The focal lengths marked on a Micro Four Thirds lens are equivalent to twice those of a
35 mm film camera. (The focal lengths will be equivalent to those of a 100 mm lens in 35 mm
terms when a 50 mm lens is used.)
20
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
• We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from
dropping.
1
Pass the shoulder strap through the
shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.
A: Shoulder strap eyelet
2
Pass the end of the shoulder strap
through the ring in the direction of the
arrow and then pass it through the
stopper.
3
Pass the end of the shoulder strap
through the hole on the other side of the
stopper.
4
Pull the shoulder strap and
then check that it will not
come out.
• Perform steps
1 to 4 and then
attach the other side of the
shoulder strap.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
21
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Charging the Battery
∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit
• The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.
• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully
charged. (Since characteristic swelling may occur.)
• Use the charger, AC adaptor (supplied), USB connection cable (for charger), and battery
that are designed for exclusive use with the camera.
• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.
1 Connect the charger and the AC adaptor (supplied) with the USB connection
cable (for charger).
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or
in wrong direction.)
2 Insert the AC adaptor (supplied) into the power outlet.
3 Attach the battery by paying attention to its direction,
then slide the battery in until it is secure.
• The [CHARGE] indicator E lights up and charging begins.
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine product are made available for purchase in some markets. Some of
these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet
the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that
these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are
not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit
battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used, we recommend that a
genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
Charging the battery with the charger
A Charger (for exclusive use with the camera)
B USB connection cable (for charger)
C AC adaptor (supplied)
D To power outlet
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
22
∫ [CHARGE] indicator
• When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes
– The battery temperature is too high or too low. It is recommended to charge the battery again
in an ambient temperature of between 10 oC and 30 oC (50 oF and 86 oF).
– The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth.
∫ Charging time
When the charger (supplied) is used
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been
used for a long time may be longer than normal.
∫ Battery indication
• The battery level indicated on the screen is approximate. The exact level varies depending on
the environment and the operating conditions.
On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
(After charging is complete, disconnect the AC adaptor (supplied) from
the power outlet and remove the battery.)
Charging time Approx. 190 min
A Monitor
display
B Status LCD
display
75% or higher
74% to 50%
49% to 25%
24% or below
Low battery
• Recharge the battery or replace it
with a fully charged battery.
Blinking red Blinks
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use a USB extension cable.
• Do not use the AC adaptor (supplied) and the USB connection cable (for charger) for other
devices. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• The AC adaptor is in the standby condition when the mains plug is connected. The primary
circuit is always “live” as long as the mains plug is connected to an electrical outlet.
AFSAFS
L
23
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
• Check that this unit is turned off.
1 1: Slide the release lever in the direction of
the arrow (to the OPEN side).
2: Open the battery door.
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries.
• If you use other batteries, we cannot
guarantee the quality of this product.
2 Being careful about the battery orientation,
insert all the way until you hear a locking
sound and then check that it is locked by
lever A.
When removing the battery, push the lever A
toward the arrow and pull out the battery.
3 1: Close the battery door.
2: Slide the release lever in the direction of
the arrow.
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Confirm that there is no foreign matter adhered on the inner side (rubber seal) of the battery
door.
• Remove the battery after use.
(The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after being charged.)
• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera
also becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Turn the camera off and wait for the “LUMIX” display on the monitor to clear before removing
the battery.
(Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or
the recorded pictures may be lost.)
• Be careful when removing the battery as the battery will jump out.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
24
• Use the dedicated AC adaptor (supplied), USB connection cable (supplied) and battery.
• The battery cannot be charged when inserted in the battery grip (optional).
(Charging from the power outlet)
Connect the AC adaptor (supplied) and this camera with the USB connection cable
(supplied), and insert the AC adaptor (supplied) into the power outlet.
(Charging from a computer)
Connect the computer and this camera with the USB connection cable (supplied).
• If the computer enters a suspended state while charging the battery, charging will stop.
• Connecting this camera to a notebook computer that is not connected to a power outlet will
cause the notebook computer battery to drain faster. Do not leave the camera connected for
extended periods of time.
• Be sure to always connect the camera to a computer USB terminal.
Do not connect the camera to a monitor, keyboard or printer USB terminal, or a USB hub.
Charging the battery with the camera
Camera conditions Charge
Turned off
±
Turne d on —
Insert the battery into this unit.
Check that this unit is turned off.
A Connect the USB connection cable
(supplied) to the [USB/CHARGE] socket.
B Charging lamp
C AC adaptor (supplied)
D To power outlet
E PC (Turned on)
F USB connection cable (supplied)
• Check the direction of the terminals and
plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the
deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in
obliquely or in wrong direction.)
25
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ [CHARGE] indicator
• When the charging lamp flashes
– Reconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) in a location where the ambient temperature
(and the temperature of battery) is in a 10 oC to 30 oC (50 oF to 86 oF) range, and try charging
again.
– If your PC is not capable of supplying sufficient power, charging is not possible.
∫ Charging time
When using the AC adaptor (supplied)
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been
used for a long time may be longer than normal.
• When power is supplied from a computer, the power supply capacity of the computer
determines the charging time.
Lit red: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
(When charging is complete, disconnect the camera from the power
outlet or computer.)
Charging time Approx. 230 min
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other AC adaptors except the supplied one.
This may cause malfunction.
• Do not use a USB extension cable.
• Do not use the AC adaptor (supplied) and the USB connection cable (supplied) for other
devices. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• If a problem occurs in the power outlet, such as a power outage, charging may not be
completed normally. If this happens, disconnect the USB connection cable (supplied) and
connect it again.
• The AC adaptor is in the standby condition when the mains plug is connected. The primary
circuit is always “live” as long as the mains plug is connected to an electrical outlet.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
26
If you connect the camera to a power outlet or PC while the camera is turned on, power
can be supplied via the USB connection cable (supplied).
• Insert the battery into this unit.
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen while power is being supplied.
• In certain situations where the camera is used, such as during recording, the battery
may drain. The camera will turn off when the battery power runs out.
• If the ambient temperature is high or power is supplied continuously, after [ ] is displayed,
the supply of power may stop. Wait until the camera cools down.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (supplied), turn the camera off.
• Power may not be supplied depending on the power supply capacity of the PC.
About the power supply
27
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
• The numbers of recordable pictures listed here are based on the CIPA (Camera & Imaging
Products Association) standard.
• When a Panasonic SDHC memory card and the supplied battery are used.
∫ Recording still pictures (when using the Monitor)
∫ Recording still pictures (when using the Viewfinder)
The numbers in parentheses indicate the values that result when [Time] in [Power Save
LVF Shooting] is set to [1SEC] and the [Power Save LVF Shooting] function works as
intended. (Based on the test conditions derived from the CIPA standard and specified by
Panasonic)
∫ Recording motion pictures (when using the monitor)
[AVCHD] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/17M/60i])
Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 380 pictures
Recording time Approx. 190 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 400 pictures
Recording time Approx. 200 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 360 pictures (Approx. 890 pictures)
Recording time Approx. 180 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 380 pictures (Approx. 920 pictures)
Recording time Approx. 190 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 130 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 65 min
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
28
[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/28M/60p])
[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [4K/150M/60p])
• Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as
turning this unit on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
∫ Playback (when using the monitor)
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 130 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 65 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 110 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 55 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Recordable time Approx. 120 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 60 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is used
Playback time Approx. 260 min
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is used
Playback time Approx. 280 min
• The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the
environment and the operating conditions.
For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of
recordable pictures is reduced.
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging
the battery, the life of the battery may have expired. Buy a new battery.
29
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Inserting/Removing the Card (Optional)
• Check that this unit is turned off.
1
Slide the card door to open it.
2
Push it securely all the way until you hear a
click while being careful about the direction
in which you insert it.
To remove the card, push the card until it
clicks, then pull the card out upright.
• One card can be inserted into each of the card slot 1
A and the card slot 2 B.
C: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card.
3
1: Close the card door.
2: Slide the card door to the end and then
close it firmly.
∫ Card access indicators
Access indication
Lights up red while an image is being recorded to the card.
• During access (image writing, reading and deleting, formatting etc.), do not turn this unit
off, remove the battery, card or disconnect the AC adaptor. Furthermore, do not subject
the camera to vibration, impact or static electricity.
Doing so may damage the card or recorded data or cause the camera to stop working
correctly.
If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation
again.
• Turn the camera off and wait for the “LUMIX” display on the monitor to clear before removing
the card.
(Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or the
recorded pictures may be lost.)
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
30
Card Information
The following cards which conform to the SD standard can be used with this unit.
(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)
∫ Recording of motion pictures/6K photos/4K photos and speed class ratings
Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class or UHS Speed Class.
• SD Speed Class and UHS Speed Class are the speed standards regarding continuous writing.
To check the class, see the labeled side, etc. of the card.
• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
SD Memory Card
(512 MB to 2 GB)
• This unit is compatible with UHS-I/UHS-II UHS Speed Class
3 standard SDHC/SDXC memory cards.
• Operation of the cards on the left has been confirmed with
Panasonic’s cards.
SDHC Memory Card
(4 GB to 32 GB)
SDXC Memory Card
(48 GB to 128 GB)
[Rec Format] [Rec Quality] Speed class Label example
[AVCHD] All
Class 4 or higher
[MP4]
FHD
4K UHS Speed Class 3
High Speed Video
6K/4K Photo
Post Focus function
UHS Speed Class 3
• If you set the Write-Protect switch A to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write,
delete or format the data or display it by recording date.
• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves,
static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing
important data on a PC etc.
• Keep the memory card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
31
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary
data in advance.
∫ Number of recordable pictures
• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [A]
• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [ ]
∫ Available recording time (when recording motion pictures)
• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been recorded.
• [AVCHD]
Formatting the card (initialization)
> [Setup] > [Format] > [Slot 1]/[Slot 2]
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) when formatting. Do
not turn the camera off during formatting.
• If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again.
Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording
time
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
L (20M) 1450 2910 5810 11510
M (10M) 2630 5280 10510 20810
S (5M) 4600 9220 17640 34940
[Picture Size]
Card capacity
16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
L (20M) 450 900 1810 3590
M (10M) 520 1050 2110 4180
S (5M) 570 1150 2290 4550
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[FHD/28M/60p]
1h10m 2h25m 4h55m 9h55m
[FHD/17M/60i]
1h55m 4h05m 8h10m 16h20m
[FHD/24M/30p]
[FHD/24M/24p]
1h20m 2h50m 5h45m 11h35m
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
32
• [MP4]
• Continuous motion picture recordable times
¢ You can continue recording without interruption.
[Rec Quality]
Card capacity
16 GB 32 GB 64 GB 128 GB
[4K/150M/60p]
12m00s 27m00s 56m00s 1h50m
[4K/100M/30p]
[4K/100M/24p]
19m00s 40m00s 1h20m 2h45m
[FHD/28M/60p]
1h10m 2h25m 4h55m 9h55m
[FHD/20M/30p]
1h35m 3h15m 6h35m 13h15m
[Rec Format] [Rec Quality]
Continuous
recordable time
Size interval for dividing files
[AVCHD] All
29 minutes and
59 seconds
Files exceeding 4 GB in size will be
divided into smaller files for
recording.
¢
[MP4]
FHD
Files exceeding 4 GB in size will be
divided into smaller files for recording
and playback.
¢
[4K/100M/30p]
[4K/100M/24p]
When an SDHC card is used: Files
exceeding 4 GB in size will be
divided into smaller files for recording
and playback.
¢
When an SDXC card is used: Files
are not divided for recording.
[4K/150M/60p]
10 minutes
• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, the number of recordable
pictures and available recording time vary.
• Before recording, the screen displays the available recording time derived from the
amount of free space on the card; during recording, it displays the remaining time for
continuous recording.
• [9999i] is displayed on the recording screen if there are 10000 or more recordable pictures
remaining.
33
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Attaching/Removing the Lens
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to
P333 when dirt or dust gets on
the lens.
∫ Attaching the lens
1 Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the arrow to
detach them.
2 Align the lens fitting marks C and then rotate the lens in the direction of the
arrow until it clicks.
• Do not press the lens release button D when you attach a lens.
• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens
mount may get scratched.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
34
∫ Detaching the lens
• Attach the lens cap.
While pressing on the lens release button A, rotate the
lens toward the arrow until it stops and then remove.
• When the lens is removed from the camera, dust and other particles may accumulate on or
enter the camera or lens.
Be sure to attach the body cap and the lens rear cap.
∫ Zoom operations
When using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/
H-FS12060)
Rotate the zoom ring of the lens.
T side: Enlarges distant subject
W side: Widens angle of view
T
W
35
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
∫ Attaching the Lens Hood
When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within the lens. The
lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the
drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.
To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the interchangeable lenses
(H-ES12060/H-FS12060)
Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as
shown in the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be
bent.
1 Align the mark A ( ) on the lens hood with the
mark on the tip of the lens.
2 Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the
arrow until it clicks and then align the mark B
( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip
of the lens.
∫ Removing the lens hood (H-ES12060)
Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow while
pushing the button C on the lens hood.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
36
Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood
Example: H-ES12060
1 Rotate the lens hood in the direction of the arrow while pushing the button A on the
lens hood.
2 Align the mark B( ) on the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the lens.
3 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.
37
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Opening the Monitor
At the time when this camera is purchased, the monitor is stowed in the camera body.
Bring out the monitor as shown below.
1 Open the monitor. (Maximum 180o)
2 It can be rotated 180o forward.
3 Return the monitor to its original position.
• When rotating the monitor, be careful not to apply too much force. Doing so may cause
damage.
∫ Free angle shooting
The monitor can be rotated to suit your needs. This is convenient as it allows you to take
pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor.
Taking pictures at a high angle Taking pictures at a low angle
• When not using the monitor it is recommended that you close it with the screen facing inward
to prevent dirt and scratches.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
38
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set)
• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.
1
Turn the camera on.
• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed
to step
4.
2
Press [MENU/SET].
3
Press 3/4 to select the language, and press
[MENU/SET].
4
Press [MENU/SET].
5
Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month,
day, hour, minute), and press 3/4 to set.
A: Time at the home area
B: Time at the travel destination
To set the display order and the time display
format.
• To display the setting screen of the order/time, select
[Style] and then press [MENU/SET].
6
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
39
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
7
When [The clock setting has been completed.] is displayed, press
[MENU/SET].
8
When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press [MENU/SET].
9
Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then
press [MENU/SET].
∫ Re-adjusting the clock
• The clock can be reset as shown in steps
5 and 6 on P38.
• The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even
without the battery.
(Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the built-in battery.)
> [Setup] > [Clock Set]
• To place the correct date on pictures, set the clock before recording.
Otherwise, the correct date will not be printed when you order a photo studio to print pictures
or you will not be able to stamp the correct date on pictures.
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
40
Basic Operations
Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at your side and stand
with your feet slightly apart.
• Do not cover the AF Assist lamp A, or microphone B with your fingers or other objects.
• Make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another person or
object in the vicinity while taking pictures.
∫ Detects orientation of camera (Direction Detection Function)
This function detects the vertical orientation when you record
with the camera vertically orientated.
When you play back the recording, the recording is
automatically displayed in vertical orientation.
(Only available when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [ON].)
• When the camera is held vertically and tilted significantly up or down to record, the Direction
Detection Function may not work correctly.
• Motion pictures, 6K/4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post Focus function cannot be
displayed vertically.
Set the camera ON/OFF switch to [ ].
• When the camera ON/OFF switch is released, it returns to the
[ON] position and the status LCD backlight turns off after approx.
5 seconds.
• To turn off the status LCD backlight immediately, set the camera
ON/OFF switch to [ ] again.
• If you start recording while the status LCD backlight is turned on, it will turn off.
• The status LCD backlight cannot be turned on when recording motion pictures or using [6K/4K
Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] in [6K/4K PHOTO].
Tips for taking good pictures
Turn on the status LCD backlight
41
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Rotate the diopter adjustment dial.
• Adjust until you can see the characters displayed in the
viewfinder clearly.
Press [LVF].
A [LVF] button
B Eye sensor
¢ If [Eye Sensor AF] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is set to [ON], the
camera automatically adjusts the focus as the eye sensor is activated. The camera does not
beep when focus is achieved with [Eye Sensor AF].
∫ Notes on automatic viewfinder/monitor switching
Bring your eye or an object near the viewfinder to automatically switch to the viewfinder
display using the eye sensor.
• To reduce the battery consumption, set [Power Save LVF Shooting] in [Economy]
(P223).
• Eye sensor might not work properly depending on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you
hold the camera, or bright light shining around the eyepiece. In that case, press [LVF] to switch
the display.
• During motion picture playback or a slide show, the camera does not automatically switch the
display to the Viewfinder with the eye sensor.
• The eye sensor does not work depending on the angle of the monitor.
Using the Viewfinder
Diopter adjustment
Switching the Monitor/Viewfinder
Automatic viewfinder/
monitor switching
¢
Viewfinder display
¢
Monitor display
ョㄏピ
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
42
Press [V.MODE].
• The magnification factors that can be switched between differ
depending on the [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] setting in the [Custom]
([Monitor / Display]) menu.
– [ ] (Viewfinder Style): Two levels
– [ ] (Monitor Style): Three levels
The shutter button works in two steps.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
A Aperture value
B Shutter speed
C Focus indication
• Aperture value and shutter speed are displayed.
(It will flash in red if the correct exposure is not achieved, except
when set to flash.)
• Once the subject is in focus, the focus indication is displayed.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication flashes.)
Press the shutter button fully (push it in further), and
take the picture.
Change the display magnification of the viewfinder
Shutter button (Taking pictures)
• Pictures cannot be taken until focus is achieved when [Focus/Release Priority] is set to
[FOCUS].
• Even during menu operation or image playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you
can instantly set the camera ready for recording.
60
60
602.8
2.8
2.8
43
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Start recording by pressing the motion picture button.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture
button again.
Press the mode dial lock button 1 to
release the lock.
• The dial is locked if the mode dial lock button is
depressed.
Rotate the mode dial 2 and adjust the
recording mode.
Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)
Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode)
Intelligent Auto Mode (P65)
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (P66)
Program AE Mode (P71)
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (P74)
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (P74)
Manual Exposure Mode (P75)
Creative Video Mode (P171)
Custom Mode (P85)
Creative Control Mode (P79)
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
44
Rotating:
Selection of items or setting of values is performed during the various settings.
• This owner’s manual describe operations of the front dial/rear dial as follows:
Allows you to set the aperture, shutter speed, and other settings when in ///
modes.
Front Dial/Rear Dial
e.g.: When rotating the front dial to the left
or right
e.g.: When rotating the rear dial to the left
or right
Mode dial Front dial Rear Dial
Program Shift Program Shift
Aperture value Aperture value
Shutter speed Shutter speed
Aperture value Shutter speed
45
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Temporarily changing the items assigned to the front/rear dials ([Dial Operation
Switch])
1 Set a function button to [Dial Operation Switch]. (P60)
2 Press the function button.
• A guide will be displayed showing the items temporarily
assigned to the front/rear dials.
• If no operations are performed, the guide will disappear in
a few seconds.
3 Rotate the front/rear dials while the guide is
displayed.
4 Press [MENU/SET] and set.
• You can also complete this step by performing either of the operations below:
– Press the shutter button halfway
– Press the function button
• You can set the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials in [Dial Operation
Switch Setup] in [Dial Set.] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(P47)
989898
0
ISOISOISOISO
WBWBWBWB
AWBc
AWBc
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
ISOISOISOISO
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
46
Rotating:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.
• The operation of rotating the control dial is illustrated as below in
this owner’s manual.
Example: When rotating the control dial to the left or right:
∫ Setting the operation methods of the dial
Control Dial
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.]
[Assign Dial (F/SS)]
Assigns the operations of the aperture value and shutter speed
in Manual Exposure Mode.
[F SS]:
Assigns the aperture value to the front dial, and the shutter
speed to the rear dial.
[SS F]:
Assigns the shutter speed to the front dial, and the aperture
value to the rear dial.
[Rotation (F/SS)]
Changes the rotation direction of the dials for adjusting the
aperture value and shutter speed.
[]/[]
[Control Dial Assignment]
It sets the item to be assigned to the control dial while the
recording screen is displayed.
[] ([Headphone Volume])/
[/] ([Exposure / Aperture])
¢ 1
/
[] ([Exposure Comp.])/[] ([Sensitivity] )/
[] ([Focus Frame Size])
¢ 2
¢1 A function that sets the aperture value is assigned when
the camera is set to Manual Exposure Mode. If it is set to a
mode other than Manual Exposure Mode, a function that
compensates the exposure is assigned.
¢2 When the Auto Focus Mode is set to [š], [ ], [ ] or
[Ø], a function that adjusts the AF area size is assigned.
When the Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ] or Manual Focus
is used, a function that changes the magnification factor of
the assist screen is assigned.
MENU
47
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Pressing the cursor button:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.
Pressing [MENU/SET]:
Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.
• This owner’s manual expresses the up, down, left, and right of
the cursor button as 3/4/2/1.
[Exposure Comp.]
Assigns the Exposure Compensation to the front dial or rear
dial so that you can directly adjust it.
[] (Front Dial)/[ ] (Rear Dial)/[OFF]
[Dial Operation Switch
Setup]
Sets the items to be assigned temporarily to the front/rear dials
when you press the function button to which [Dial Operation
Switch] is assigned.
[] ([Front Dial Operation])/[ ] ([Rear Dial Operation])
• Items that can be set are as follows.
– [Photo Style]
– [Filter Effect]
– [Aspect Ratio]
– [AF Mode]
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [Highlight Shadow]
– [i.Dynamic]
– [i.Resolution]
– [Flash Mode]
– [Flash Adjust.]
– [Sensitivity]
– [White Balance]
• [Highlight Shadow] uses the two dials.
Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
48
∫ Changing the function to be used while the recording screen is displayed
You can switch to the camera setting that enables the assigned function.
You can set the items to be assigned to the function lever in [Fn Lever Setting] in the
[Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
(P63)
Change the function lever position.
Joystick
The joystick provides the same functions as the cursor
buttons/[MENU/SET] button.
Moving:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is
performed.
Pressing:
Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is
performed.
• In this owner’s manual, the up, down, left and right of the
joystick are expressed as 3/4/2/1.
Moving Pressing
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Joystick Setting]
[D.FOCUS Movement]
Allows you to move the display positions of the AF area and MF
Assist.
(P100, 103)
[Fn] Uses a function assigned in [Fn Button Set].
[MENU]
Displays the menu when the joystick is pressed.
• Operations that can be performed by moving the joystick are
disabled.
[OFF] Disables the joystick.
Function lever
MODE1
The normal setting where the assigned
function is disabled.
MODE2
The setting where the assigned function is
enabled.
• Assigned functions may not operate, depending on the mode selected or the screen
displayed.
MENU
49
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Press [DISP.].
You can select separate screen display styles for the viewfinder and the monitor.
• [ ] Live View Finder style display layout (Example of viewfinder style display)
[DISP.] button (Switching the displayed information)
In Recording Mode
> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display] > [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] > [LVF
Disp. Set]/[Monitor Disp. Set]
[] (viewfinder style)
Scales down images slightly so that you can better review the
composition of the images.
[] (monitor style)
Scales images to fill the entire screen so that you can see their
details.
With information
(detailed
information)
With information
With information
(detailed
information, tilt
sensor display)
With information
(tilt sensor
display)
ュリヴヱハ
MENU
98
0
AFSAFS
L
4:3
60
p
98
0
98
0
AFSAFS
L
4:3
60
p
98
0
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
50
• [ ] Monitor style display layout (Example of monitor style display)
¢ When the on-monitor recording information screen is displayed, you can touch the desired
item and change its setting directly.
∫ About the tilt sensor display
With the tilt sensor displayed, it is easy to correct the tilt of the camera etc.
• When there is no tilt, the indicator color changes to green.
With information
Without
information
With information
(tilt sensor
display)
Without
information (tilt
sensor display)
Turned off
On-monitor
recording
information
¢
• With [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can assign [LVF/Monitor Disp.
Style] to a function button.
Each time you press the assigned function button, the display style of the monitor or
viewfinder ([ ]/[ ]), whichever is currently in use, will change.
A Horizontal direction: Correcting tilt to the left
B Vertical direction: Correcting downward tilt
• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approximately n1°.
• When tilted significantly upwards or downwards to record, the tilt sensor display may not be
displayed correctly, and the Direction Detection Function may not work correctly.
989898
AFSAFS
L
4:3
0
60
p
989898
AFSAFS
L
4:3
0
60
p
98
98
AWB
0 0
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFS
AFS
51
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
¢1 Press 3/4 to switch between the following display modes:
– Detailed information display
– Histogram display
– Photo style, Highlight shadow display
– White balance display
– Lens information display
¢2 This is displayed if [Highlight] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ON].
• Some of the screens cannot be displayed for certain files that you play back, such as motion
pictures and 6K/4K burst files.
In Playback Mode
With information
Detailed
information
display
¢1
Without
information
(Highlight
display)
¢2
Without
information
60F2.8
0
AWBAWB
1/98981/98
2
00
L
4:3
s
RGB
1/5
AFS
200
L
4:3
100-0001
AWB
STD.
ISOISO
0
F2.8
60
10:00 DEC. 1.2018
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
52
∫ Touch
To touch and release the touch screen.
∫ Drag
A movement without releasing the touch screen.
∫ Pinch (enlarge/reduce)
Pinch the touch screen apart (enlarge) or together
(reduce) with two fingers.
Touch screen (Touch operations)
• Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.
• If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions
that accompany the sheet.
(Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)
Not available in these cases:
• The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.
– When touched by a gloved hand
– When the touch screen is wet
Fn10Fn10Fn10
Fn7Fn7Fn7
Fn6
Fn6Fn6
Fn8
Fn8Fn8
Fn9Fn9Fn9
OFFOFFOFF
AABBB
2.0X2.0X2.0X2.0X
53
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Applicable modes:
Just by touching the subject you want as your point of focus, the camera will focus on the
subject and take the picture automatically.
∫ To cancel the Touch Shutter function
Touch [ ].
Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function
Touch Shutter function
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch [ ].
• Icon will change to [ ], and taking a picture with the
Touch Shutter function becomes possible.
3 Touch the subject you wish to focus on, and then
take a picture.
• The picture is taken when the focus is achieved.
• If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears.
××
×
×
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
54
Applicable modes:
You can easily optimize the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the subject
appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.
∫ Canceling the Touch AE function
Touch [ ].
• [Metering Mode] returns to the original setting, and the brightness optimization position is
canceled.
Touch AE
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch [ ].
• The setting screen for the brightness optimization position
is displayed.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively
for the Touch AE.
3 Touch the subject you want to optimize the
brightness for.
• Touch [Reset] to bring the brightness optimization position
back to the center.
4 Touch [Set].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
– When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu has been set to
[AF+AE]
AE
AE
×
×
ュリヴヱハ
6HW
5HVHW
55
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Setting menu items
You can either operate the buttons or touch the monitor to set menu items.
1
Press [MENU/SET].
2
Press 2.
• The [Setup] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and power.
Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.
3
Press 3/4 to select a menu selector icon,
such as [ ].
• You can also select the menu toggle icons by
rotating the front dial.
/ [Intelligent Auto] (P68)
These menus let you set the functions available only for
their corresponding Recording Modes.
These menus are displayed only for their corresponding
Recording Modes.
[Creative Video] (P171)
[Custom Mode] (P86)
[Creative Control] (P80)
[Rec] (P185) This menu lets you set picture settings.
[Motion Picture] (P203) This menu lets you set motion picture settings.
[Custom] (P206)
Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen
and button operations, can be set up according to your
preferences.
[Setup] (P220)
This menu lets you perform the clock settings, select the
operating beep tone settings and set other settings which
make it easier for you to operate the camera.
You can also configure the settings of Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
related functions.
[My Menu] (P232) This menu lets you register frequently-used menus.
[Playback] (P233)
This menu lets you set the playback and editing settings
for images.
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
56
4
Press [MENU/SET].
Touch a menu selector icon, such as [ ].
Touch the menu item.
• You can switch the page by touching the bar (A) on the right side of the screen.
Touch the Setting to set.
Touch operation
5
Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select
the menu item and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also select the menu item by rotating the
control dial.
• You can also move to the next screen by rotating the
rear dial.
Touch operation
To display explanations of the menu items.
If you press [DISP.] while a menu item or setting is
selected, a description of the menu is displayed.
6
Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select
the setting and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also select the setting by rotating the control
dial.
• Depending on the menu item, its setting may not
appear or it may be displayed in a different way.
Touch operation
57
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Touch [ ].
• Menu items that are not available are displayed in gray. When
a gray item is selected, if you press [MENU/SET], a message
indicating that the item cannot be set is displayed along with
the reason why it cannot be set under certain conditions.
∫ Close the menu
Press [ ] or press the shutter button halfway.
Touch operation
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
58
Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick
Menu)
1
Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.
2
Rotate the front dial to select the menu item.
• Setting can also be performed by rotating the control
dial.
3
Rotate the rear dial to select the setting.
4
Press [Q.MENU] to exit the menu once the
setting is complete.
• The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display
style the camera is in.
On-monitor recording information in [ ] (Monitor
style)
(P49)
Select the item by pressing the [Q.MENU] button and
rotating the front dial, and then select the setting by rotating
the rear dial.
ョㄏビ
AFSAFS
AU
TO
602.8
AWB
L
4:3
0
60
p
AFSAFS
AU
TO
602.8
AWB
L
4:3
0
60
p
98
98
AWB
0 0
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFSAFS
59
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can add a maximum of 15 preferred settings to the Quick Menu.
1 Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu.
2 Press 4 to select [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the menu item in the top
row and then press [MENU/SET].
4 Press 2/1 to select the empty space in the bottom
row and then press [MENU/SET].
A Items that can be set
B Set items
• You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top
row to the bottom row.
• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can
replace an existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item.
• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing 4 and select an item to cancel,
and then press [MENU/SET].
5 Press [ ].
• It will return to screen of step
2.
Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.
Customizing the Quick Menu settings
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Q.MENU] > [CUSTOM]
MENU
L
4:3
AFS
1
2
345
L
4:3
AFS
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
60
Assigning Frequently-Used Functions to
Buttons/Lever (Function Buttons/Function
Lever)
You can assign various features, such as recording functions, to specific buttons and icons
as well as the function lever.
1 Select the menu.
2 Press 3/4 to select the function button you want to
assign a function to and then press [MENU/SET].
• To select a button from [Fn11] to [Fn19] in [Setting in REC
mode], press [DISP.] to switch the screen.
3 Press 3/4 to select the function you want to assign
and then press [MENU/SET].
• For details on the functions that can be assigned in
[Setting in REC mode], refer to
P61.
• For details on the functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode], refer to
P62.
• To restore the default function button settings, select [Restore to Default].
• Some functions cannot be assigned depending on the function button.
Assigning functions to function buttons
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Fn Button Set]>
[Setting in REC mode]/[Setting in PLAY mode]
• Touching [Fn] on the on-monitor recording information screen (P49) also allows you to display
the screen in step
2.
• If you press and hold a function button (any of [Fn1] to [Fn5] or [Fn11] to [Fn19]) for
2 seconds, the screen displayed in step
3 can be displayed.
In some cases, however, the screen cannot be displayed depending on the currently selected
mode or the currently displayed screen.
MENU
61
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
You can use assigned functions by pressing a function button when recording.
∫ Using the buttons [Fn6] to [Fn10] (touch operations)
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch [Fn6], [Fn7], [Fn8], [Fn9] or [Fn10].
∫ Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in REC mode]
¢ Function button settings at the time of purchase.
• By default, [Off] is assigned to the buttons [Fn10] to [Fn19].
Using the function buttons during recording
– [Wi-Fi]: [Fn6]
¢
– [Q.MENU]: [Fn2]
¢
– [Video Record]
– [LVF/Monitor Switch]:
[Fn3]
¢
– [LVF/Monitor Disp. Style]
– [AF-Point Scope]: [Fn4]
¢
– [AF/AE LOCK]
–[AF-ON]
– [Preview]: [Fn5]
¢
– [One Push AE]
– [Touch AE]
– [Level Gauge]: [Fn8]
¢
– [Focus Area Set]
– [Zoom Control]
– [1 Shot RAW+JPG]
– [1 Shot Spot Metering]
– [1 Shot "6K/4K PHOTO"]
– [Operation Lock]
– [Dial Operation Switch]
– [Destination Slot]
– [Photo Style]
– [Filter Effect]
– [Aspect Ratio]
– [Picture Size]
– [Quality]
– [AFS/AFF]
– [Metering Mode]
– [Burst Shot Setting]
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [Self Timer]
– [High Resolution Mode]
– [Bracket]
– [Highlight Shadow]
– [i.Dynamic]
– [i.Resolution]
– [Min. Shtr Speed]
– [Post Focus]
– [HDR]
– [Shutter Type]
– [Flash Mode]
– [Flash Adjust.]
– [Wireless Flash Setup]
– [Ex. Tele Conv.]
– [Digital Zoom]
– [Stabilizer]
– [I.S. Lock (Video)]: [Fn9]
¢
– [4K Live Cropping]
– [Motion Pic. Set]
– [Picture Mode in Rec.]
– [Mic Level Adj.]
– [Mic. Directivity Adjust]
– [Silent Mode]
– [Peaking]
– [Histogram]: [Fn7]
¢
– [Guide Line]
– [Zebra Pattern]
– [Monochrome Live View]
– [Constant Preview]
– [Rec Area]
– [Step Zoom]
– [Zoom Speed]
– [Night Mode]
– [Exposure Comp.]
– [Sensitivity]
– [White Balance]
– Each item in [White
Balance]
– Each item in [Photo Style]
– [AF Mode/MF]: [Fn1]
¢
– [Rec / Playback Switch]
–[Off]
– [Restore to Default]
Fn10Fn10Fn10
Fn7Fn7Fn7
Fn6Fn6Fn6
Fn8
Fn8Fn8
OFFOFFOFF
Fn9Fn9Fn9
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
62
You can directly set an assigned function to a selected image by pressing the function
button during playback.
Example: When [Fn1] is set to [Rating¿3]
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2 Press [Fn1], and then set the image as [Rating¿3].
∫ Functions that can be assigned in [Setting in PLAY mode]
• The following functions can be assigned to the button [Fn1], [Fn3], [Fn4] or [Fn5].
¢ Function button settings at the time of purchase.
• By default, [Off] is assigned to the buttons [Fn4] or [Fn5].
• With [Video Record], you can start/stop recording a motion picture in the same way as with the
motion picture button.
• When set to [Focus Area Set], it is possible to display the position setting screen of either AF
area or MF Assist.
• When [1 Shot RAW+JPG] is set, it will record the RAW file and a fine JPEG image
simultaneously once only. It will return to original quality after recording.
• When [1 Shot Spot Metering] is set, it will record with [Metering Mode] set to [ ] (spot) once
only. It will return to original Metering Mode after recording.
• When [1 Shot "6K/4K PHOTO"] is set, recording is performed in a specified 6K/4K Photo
Mode only once. After the recording has finished, the camera returns to normal state.
• When [Operation Lock] is set, a certain type of operation is disabled. Set the type of operation
to be disabled in [Operation Lock Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu.
• [Destination Slot] is available only when [Double Slot Function] is set to [Relay Rec].
• If you assign [Rec / Playback Switch], you can switch between recording and playback
modes.
Using the function buttons during playback
– [Wi-Fi]: [Fn1]
¢
– [LVF/Monitor Switch]: [Fn3]
¢
– [Rec / Playback Switch]
– [Slot Change]
– [6K/4K Photo Play]
– [Delete Single]
– [Protect]
–[Rating¿1]
–[Rating¿2]
–[Rating¿3]
–[Rating¿4]
–[Rating¿5]
– [RAW Processing]
– [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
–[Copy]
– [Night Mode]
–[Off]
– [Restore to Default]
3
3
3
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
63
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
Register a function and its setting that operate when you set the function lever (P48) to
[MODE2].
1 Select the menu.
2 Press 3/4 to select the function you want to assign, and press [MENU/SET].
¢ Default function lever setting.
• To reset the function lever setting to the default, select [Restore to Default].
3 Press 3/4 to select [MODE 2 Setting], and press [MENU/SET].
4 Press 3/4 to select the function setting selected in
step
2, and press [MENU/SET].
• The screen shown here is an example, where [Self Timer]
has been assigned to register it in combination with the
[ ] setting.
• If you assign [Slot Change], a screen will be displayed, allowing you to switch the card slot for
playback.
• If you assign [6K/4K Photo Play], a screen will be displayed, allowing you to select the
pictures to be extracted from a 6K/4K burst file and saved.
Assigning a function to the function lever
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Fn
Lever Setting] > [Function of Fn Lever]
– [AF Mode]
– [Quality]
– [Photo Style]
– [Long Shtr NR]
– [Stabilizer]
– [6K/4K PHOTO (Pre-Burst)]
– [Self Timer]
– [Silent Mode]
¢
– [Shutter Type]
– [Bracket]
– [Touch Screen]
– [Touch Pad AF]
– [Auto Review (Photo)]
– [Peaking]
– [Night Mode]
– [Front/Rear/Control Dial Lock]
–[Off]
– [Restore to Default]
• Assigning [Front/Rear/Control Dial Lock] will disable the front/rear/control dial operation of
screens such as the recording screen.
MENU
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations
64
Entering Text
Follow the steps below when the text entry screen is displayed.
1
Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then
press [MENU/SET] to register.
• To enter the same character again, rotate the control dial
right to move the cursor.
• The following operations can be performed by moving
the cursor to the item and pressing [MENU/SET]:
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
(Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ].
(Maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
2
Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [Set] and then press [MENU/
SET] to end text input.
– [ ]: Switch text between [A] (upper case characters), [a] (lower case
characters), [1] (numbers), and [&] (special characters)
–[]]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
65
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function
(Intelligent Auto Mode)
Recording Mode:
In this mode, the camera makes the optimal settings for the subject and scene.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
• At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent
Auto Plus Mode.
2
Align the screen with the subject.
• When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon
of the scene concerned will change.
(Automatic Scene Detection)
3. Recording Modes
66
The camera detects scenes automatically (Scene Detection)
( : When taking pictures, : When recording motion pictures)
∫ The Backlight Compensation
• When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically
attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.
∫ Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode
1 Select the menu.
2 Press 3/4 to select [ ] or [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].
[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]
¢1
[i-Night Scenery]
[iHandheld Night
Shot]
¢2
[i-Food] [i-Baby]
¢3
[i-Sunset] [i-Low Light]
¢1 Displayed when an external flash is used.
¢2 Only displayed when [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON].
¢3 When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], [ ] will be displayed for
birthdays of registered faces already set only when the Face/Eye of
a person younger than 3 years old is detected.
•[¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard
settings are set.
• When recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus
function, Scene Detection works in the same way as when motion
picture is recorded.
¦
> [Intelligent Auto] > [Intelligent Auto Mode]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
67
3. Recording Modes
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode allows you to adjust the settings below while also using
Intelligent Auto Mode for other settings.
∫ Auto Focus, Face/Eye Detection, and Face Recognition
The Auto Focus Mode is automatically set to [š]. If you touch the subject, the AF tracking
function will work.
• The AF tracking function will also work if you press [ ] and then press the shutter button
halfway.
• You cannot specify the person or eye to be brought into focus when using [
š].
• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered
face is detected, [R] is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].
∫ About the flash
When recording with the flash, the camera automatically selects [ ], [ ] (AUTO/
Red-Eye Reduction), [ ] or [ ] according to the type and brightness of the subject.
∫ Scene Detection
• Use a tripod or similar support when the scene detection has been identified as [ ].
When the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal, the shutter speed becomes slower
than normal.
Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures.
• Depending on recording conditions, different scene types may be selected for the same
subject.
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode
Setting the brightness ± —
Setting the color tone ± —
Defocus Control ± —
Menus that can be set Many Few
• For information on the external flash, refer to P155.
• When [ ] or [ ] is set, Red-Eye Removal is enabled.
• Shutter speed will be slower during [ ] or [ ].
3. Recording Modes
68
Set the functions available only for Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode.
When [ ] is detected while taking handheld night shots, pictures of the night scenery will
be taken at a high burst speed and composed into a single picture.
When there is, for example, strong contrast between the background and the subject,
multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures and combined to create a
single still picture rich in gradation.
[iHDR] works automatically as needed. When it does, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
[Intelligent Auto] menu
> [Intelligent Auto]
Taking handheld shots of night scenes ([iHandheld Night Shot])
> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHandheld Night Shot] > [ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.
• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
Combining pictures into a single picture with rich gradation ([iHDR])
> [Intelligent Auto] > [iHDR] > [ON]/[OFF]
• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.
• Do not move the camera during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
Not available in these cases:
• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] do not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture
recording.
• [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR] are not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post
Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording with the Bracket
function
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Rec] menu is set
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when
[Auto Shooting] is set)
• [iHDR] is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash
MENU
MENU
MENU
69
3. Recording Modes
Recording Mode:
∫ Setting color
1 Press [ ].
2 Rotate the rear dial to adjust color.
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
• The color setting will return to the default level (center
point) when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched
to another Recording Mode.
∫ Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus
Control)
1 Press [ ] to display the brightness setting screen.
2 Press [Fn1] to display the setting screen.
3 Set the blurriness by rotating the rear dial.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
• To cancel the setting, press [Fn2] on the blurriness setting
screen.
• Auto Focus Mode is set to [Ø].
The position of the AF area can be set by touching the
screen. (Its size cannot be changed)
∫ Setting brightness
1 Press [ ].
2 Rotate the rear dial to adjust brightness.
• You can adjust the Exposure Bracket setting by pressing
3/4 while the brightness setting screen is displayed.
(P142)
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
Taking pictures with customized color, defocus control, and brightness
settings
A
AB
B
B
SS
SS
SS
F
F
500 250 125 60 30
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
+1
+1
OFF
OFF
3. Recording Modes
70
Change the settings by using the touch screen
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Color tone
[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens while operating Defocus
Control. This is due to the aperture operation of the lens and is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may be recorded
during the recording of a motion picture when the function is used.
71
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures with Automatically Adjusted
Aperture and Shutter Speed (Program AE
Mode)
Recording Mode:
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the
brightness of the subject.
You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in the [Rec]
menu.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Press the shutter button halfway and display
the aperture value and shutter speed value
on the screen.
A Aperture value
B Shutter speed
• If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture
value and shutter speed turn red and blink.
0
98
98
98
60
60
2.8
2.8
3. Recording Modes
72
∫ Program Shift
You can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed without changing the
exposure. This is called Program Shift.
It enables you to, for example, make the background more defocused by decreasing the
aperture value or capture a moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter
speed.
1 Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter
speed value on the screen.
2 While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds),
perform Program Shift by rotating the rear dial or
front dial.
A Program Shift indication
• To cancel Program Shift, perform either of the following
operations:
– Turn off the camera.
– Rotate the front/rear dial until the Program Shift indication disappears.
• Program Shift can easily be canceled by setting a function button to [One Push AE].
(P78)
Not available in these cases:
• Program Shift is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When the ISO sensitivity is set to [ ]
2
00
0
60
60
4.0
4.0
98
98
98
SS
SS
SS
F
F
250 125 60 30 15
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
73
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/
Shutter Speed
Recording Mode:
• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording
screen. To check on the recording screen, please use [Preview].
(P77)
• The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the pictures on the
playback screen.
• Rotate the front/rear dial to display the Exposure Meter. Unsuitable areas of the range are
displayed in red.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(Example: In Manual
Exposure Mode)
A Exposure meter
B Aperture value
C Shutter speed
Aperture
value
Small
It becomes easier to
defocus the
background.
Large
It becomes easier to
maintain focus as far as
the background.
Shutter
speed
Slow
It becomes easier to
express movement.
Fast
It becomes easier to
freeze movement.
00
+3
30
305.6
SS
SS
SS
F
F
8 15 30 60 125
5.64.02.8 8.0 11
3. Recording Modes
74
When you set the aperture value, the camera automatically optimizes the shutter speed
for the brightness of the subject.
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the aperture value by rotating the rear dial or the
front dial.
A Aperture value
B Exposure meter
When you set the shutter speed, the camera automatically optimizes the aperture value
for the brightness of the subject.
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the
front dial.
A Shutter speed
B Exposure meter
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
• When using a lens having an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to [A] to
activate the front/rear dial settings. At positions other than [A], the ring setting takes priority.
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/250th of a
second.
(P159)
8.0
8.0
8.0
SS
SS
SS
F
F
60 30 15 8 4
8.05.64.0 11 16
250
250
SS
SS
SS
F
F
60 125 250 500 1000
2.84.05.6
75
3. Recording Modes
Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Rotate the rear dial to set the shutter speed, and
rotate the front dial to set the aperture value.
A Exposure meter
B Aperture value
C Shutter speed
D Manual Exposure Assistance
Optimizing the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture value
When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], the camera sets the ISO sensitivity
automatically so that the exposure will be appropriate for the shutter speed and aperture
value.
• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO
sensitivity may become higher.
Manual Exposure Assistance
• The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures
on the playback screen.
Manual Exposure Mode
Available Shutter Speed (Sec.)
[B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/8000th (with the mechanical shutter)
[B] (Bulb), 60 to 1/2000th (with the electronic front curtain)
1 to 1/32000th (with the electronic shutter)
The exposure is adequate.
Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.
Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.
• When using a lens having an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to [A] to
activate the front/rear dial settings. At positions other than [A], the ring setting takes priority.
• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/250th of a
second.
(P159)
00
+3
30
305.6
SS
SS
SS
F
F
8 15 30 60 125
5.64.02.8 8.0 11
000
++
30
+
30
000
−
3
−
3
3. Recording Modes
76
∫ About [B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B], the shutter stays open while the shutter button is
pressed fully (up to approximately 30 minutes).
The shutter closes if you release the shutter button.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of
fireworks, a night scene etc.
• It can only be used with Manual Exposure Mode.
• We recommend using a tripod or the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional)
when you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B].
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To
avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [Long Shtr NR] in the [Rec] menu to [ON]
before taking pictures.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash (only when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND])
– When recording in Burst Mode (only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2
PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
– When using the electronic shutter
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
77
3. Recording Modes
Applicable modes:
• Confirm the effects of aperture: You can check the depth of field (effective focus range)
before taking a picture by closing the diaphragm blades to the aperture value you set.
• Confirm the effects of shutter speed: Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual
picture that will be taken with that shutter speed.
Switch to confirmation screen by pressing the preview
button.
Depth of field properties
¢1 Recording conditions
¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.
¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background
etc.
Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed (Preview Mode)
Normal recording screen
Aperture effect preview
screen
Aperture effect: ±
Shutter speed effect: —
Shutter speed effect
preview screen
Aperture effect: ±
Shutter speed effect: ±
¢1
Aperture value Small Large
Focus length of the lens Tele Wide
Distance to the subject Near Distant
Depth of field (effective focus range) Shallow (Narrow)
¢2
Deep (Wide)
¢3
• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.
• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/32000th of a second.
Not available in these cases:
• Preview Mode is not available when recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst].
6KWU6SHHG(IIHFW2Q
Fn5
([LW3UHYLHZ
Fn5
3. Recording Modes
78
Applicable modes:
When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve a
suitable exposure setting.
1 Set a function button to [One Push AE]. (P60)
2 (When exposure is not adequate)
Press function button.
• The exposure meter is displayed, and the aperture and shutter speed are changed to give
a suitable exposure.
• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.
– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure
by changing the aperture value or shutter speed
– When recording using the flash
– In Preview Mode
– When using a lens that includes an aperture ring
Easily set aperture/shutter speed for suitable exposure (One Push AE)
How to tell if the exposure is not adequate
• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
• If the Manual Exposure Assistance
(P75) is anything other than when in Manual
Exposure mode.
Blink red
The exposure is changed to give a
suitable exposure.
00
-
3
-
3
2
00
8000800080003.53.53.5
989898
98
98
98
2
00
0
60
602.8
SS
SS
SS
F
F
15 30 60 125 250
2.8 4.0 5.6
79
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures with different image effects
(Creative Control Mode)
Recording Mode:
You can set the effects to add by selecting example images and checking them on the
screen.
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Press 3/4 to select the image effects
(filters).
A Preview display
• You can also select the image effects (filters) by touching
the example images.
3
Press [MENU/SET].
Displaying the description of each image effect
Press [DISP.] while the image effect selection screen is displayed.
• When it is set to the guide display, explanations for each picture effect are displayed.
• It is also possible to display the
selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording
screen.
Normal display Guide display List display
• White Balance will be fixed to [AWB], and [Sensitivity] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• Depending on the image effect, the recording screen may seem as if frames are missed.
1/8
EXPS
EXPS
1/8
1/8
3. Recording Modes
80
∫ [Creative Control] menu
Set the functions available only for Creative Control Mode.
> [Creative Control]
[Filter Effect] Displays the image effect (filter) selection screen.
[Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter]
Allows you to set the camera to take a picture with and without an image
effect simultaneously.
Types of image effects
[Expressive] [Retro] [Old Days]
[High Key] [Low Key] [Sepia]
[Monochrome] [Dynamic
Monochrome]
[Rough
Monochrome]
[Silky
Monochrome]
[Impressive Art] [High Dynamic]
[Cross Process] [Toy Effect] [Toy Pop]
[Bleach Bypass] [Miniature Effect] [Soft Focus]
[Fantasy] [Star Filter] [One Point Color]
[Sunshine]
MENU
81
3. Recording Modes
∫ Setting the type of defocus ([Miniature Effect])
1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2 Press 3/4 or 2/1 to move the in-focus portion.
• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the
screen on the recording screen.
• To set the recording orientation (defocus orientation),
touch [ ].
3 Rotate the rear dial to change the size of in-focus
portion.
• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/
pinching in the screen.
• To reset the in-focus portion setting to the default, press [DISP.].
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
∫ Set the color to leave in ([One Point Color])
1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2 Select the color you want to leave by moving the
frame with 3/4/2/1.
• You can also select the color you want to leave by touching
the screen.
• To return the frame back to the center, press [DISP.].
3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• No sound is recorded in motion pictures.
• Approximately 1/10 of the time period is recorded.
(If you record for 10 minutes, the resulting motion picture recording will be approximately
1 minute long.)
The displayed available recording time is approximately 10 times.
• If you end motion picture recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording for a
certain period.
• Depending on the subject, the set color may not be left in.
3. Recording Modes
82
∫ Setting the position and size of the light source ([Sunshine])
1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to move the center position of the light source.
• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.
3 Adjust the size of the light source by rotating the
rear dial.
• The display can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in.
• To reset the light source setting to the default, press [DISP.].
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
1 Press [ ].
2 Rotate the rear dial to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
Point for when placing the center of the light
source
A more natural appearance can be created by placing
the center of the light source outside the image.
Adjust the effect to fit your preferences
Image effect Items that can be set
[Expressive] Freshness Understated colors Pop colors
[Retro] Color Yellowish tinge Reddish tinge
[Old Days] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[High Key] Color Pinkish tinge Aquamarinish tinge
[Low Key] Color Reddish tinge Bluish tinge
[Sepia] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
83
3. Recording Modes
Image effect Items that can be set
[Monochrome] Color Yellowish tinge Bluish tinge
[Dynamic
Monochrome]
Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[Rough
Monochrome]
Grittiness Less gritty Grittier
[Silky
Monochrome]
Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus
[Impressive Art] Freshness Black and white Pop colors
[High Dynamic] Freshness Black and white Pop colors
[Cross Process] Color
Greenish tinge/Bluish tinge/Yellowish tinge/
Reddish tinge
[Toy Effect] Color Orangish tinge Bluish tinge
[Toy Pop]
Area with reduced
peripheral brightness
Small Large
[Bleach Bypass] Contrast Low contrast High contrast
[Miniature Effect] Freshness Understated colors Pop colors
[Soft Focus] Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus
[Fantasy] Freshness Understated colors Pop colors
[Star Filter]
Length of the rays of light
Short Long
Number of the rays of light
Smaller Larger
Angle of the rays of light
Rotate to the left Rotate to the right
[One Point Color] Amount of color left
Small amount of
color
Large amount of
color
[Sunshine] Color
Yellowish tinge/Reddish tinge/Bluish tinge/Whitish
tinge
3. Recording Modes
84
1 Press [ ] to display the brightness setting screen.
2 Press [Fn1] to display the setting screen.
3 Rotate the rear dial to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
• To cancel the setting, press [Fn2] on the blurriness setting
screen.
1 Press [ ].
2 Rotate the rear dial to set.
• You can adjust the Exposure Bracket setting by pressing
3/4 while the brightness setting screen is displayed.
(P142)
• To return to the recording screen, press [ ] again.
∫ Change the settings by using the touch screen
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Adjusts an image effect
[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• To return to the recording screen, press [MENU/SET].
Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
Setting brightness
SS
SS
SS
F
F
500 250 125 60 30
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
+1
+1
OFF
OFF
EXPS
EXPS
85
3. Recording Modes
Registering your preferred settings (Custom
Mode)
Recording Mode:
Up to 5 sets of current camera settings can be registered using [Cust.Set Mem.]. ( ,
, , , )
Initial setting of the Program AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.
Preparations:
Set in advance the Recording Mode you wish to save and select the desired menu
settings on the camera.
• You can register up to three custom sets to of the mode dial.
• The following menu items are not registered as custom settings.
Registering Personal Menu Settings (Registering custom settings)
> [Setup] > [Cust.Set Mem.] >
Custom set where you want to register settings
[Custom] menu [Setup] menu
– [Menu Guide]
– Data registered with [Face Recog.]
– The [Profile Setup] setting
– All menus (Excluding [Night Mode])
[Playback] menu
– [Rotate Disp.]
– [Picture Sort]
– [Delete Confirmation]
MENU
3. Recording Modes
86
Set the mode dial to [ ], [ ] or [ ].
• The corresponding custom set will be called up. If you set the mode dial to [ ], the last used
custom set will be called up.
∫ To change a custom set in [ ] ([Custom Mode] menu)
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Select the menu.
3 Press 3/4 to select the custom setting you want to use, and then press [MENU/
SET].
• Saving of the selected custom settings is displayed on the screen.
∫ Changing the registered content
Registered contents do not change when the menu setting is changed temporarily with the
mode dial set to , or . To change the registered settings, overwrite the
registered content using [Cust.Set Mem.] on the [Setup] menu.
Calling up a registered set of custom settings
> [Custom Mode]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
C3-1C 3-1C3-1
C3-1C3-1C3-1
87
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and
Color tone Settings
Adjusting Focus Automatically
1
Set the focus mode lever to [AFS/AFF] or
[AFC].
• The Focus Mode will be set.
(P89)
2
Press [ ].
3
Press 2/1 to select AF Mode and then press
[MENU/SET].
• The Auto Focus Mode will be set.
(P92)
4
Press the shutter button halfway.
• Auto Focus will be activated.
• The focus indication is displayed as [ ] in a dark environment, and focusing may take
longer than usual.
• If the camera detects stars in the night sky after displaying [ ], Starlight AF will be
activated. When focus is achieved, the focus indication [ ] and AF areas in focus are
displayed. (Starlight AF cannot perform detection on the edges of the screen.)
Focus
When the subject is
focused
When the subject is not
focused
Focus indication A On Blinks
AF area B Green —
Sound Beeps 2 times —
ョㄏヒ
LOW
LOW
STAR
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
88
• If you zoom in/out after focusing on a subject, the focus may lose its accuracy. In that case,
re-adjust the focus.
Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus
• Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast.
• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects.
• When it is dark or when jitter occurs.
• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near
subjects.
89
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Setting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)
Applicable modes:
The method for achieving focus when the shutter button is
pressed halfway is set.
Set the focus mode lever.
Item Scene (recommended)
[AFS/
AFF]
[AFS]
Subject is still
(Scenery,
anniversary
photograph, etc.)
“AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto
Focus Single”.
The focus stays locked while the
shutter button is pressed halfway,
so you can perform recording while
changing the composition.
[AFF]
Movement cannot
be predicted
(Children, pets,
etc.)
“AFF” is an abbreviation of “Auto
Focus Flexible”.
If the subject moves while the
shutter button is pressed halfway,
the focus is readjusted
automatically according to the movement of the
subject.
You can switch the setting with [AFS/AFF] in the [Rec]/[Motion Picture]
menu.
[AFC]
Subject is moving
(Sport, trains, etc.)
“AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto
Focus Continuous”.
In this mode, while the shutter
button is pressed halfway, focusing
is constantly performed to match
the movement of the subject.
[MF] Set the focus manually. (P103)
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
90
Applicable modes:
• This item works only when the Focus Mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC].
When recording using [AFF], [AFC]
• When the subject is moving, the focusing is performed by predicting the subject position at
the time of recording. (Movement prediction)
• It may take time to focus on the subject when you operate the zoom from Wide to Tele or
suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
• Focus Mode settings of [AFF] and [AFC] work in the same manner as [AFS] in the following
situations:
– Creative Video Mode
– When recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
– In low light situations
• [AFF] is not available when recording 6K/4K photos. [Continuous AF] works during recording.
• The Focus Mode setting cannot be changed when recording is performed with the Post Focus
function.
• When recording in [High Resolution Mode], the Focus Mode [AFF] or [AFC] changes to [AFS].
Customizing the operation settings of Auto Focus for picture taking
> [Rec] > [AF Custom Setting(Photo)]
[Set 1] This is a basic general purpose setting.
[Set 2]
This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in only one
direction at a constant speed.
[Set 3]
This is a setting suited for scenes where the subject moves in random
directions and obstacles are likely to appear in the image.
[Set 4]
This is a setting suited for scenes where the speed of the subject changes
significantly.
MENU
91
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
∫ Adjusting the AF Custom settings
1 Press 2/1 to select the AF Custom setting.
2 Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1
to adjust.
• To reset to the default settings, press [DISP.].
3 Press [MENU/SET].
[AF Sensitivity]
r
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the
camera re-adjusts the focus immediately. You can bring
different subjects into focus one after another.
s
When the distance to the subject changes drastically, the
camera waits for a short period of time before re-adjusting the
focus. This allows you to prevent the focus from being
accidentally re-adjusted when, for example, an object moves
across the image.
[AF Area
Switching
Sensitivity]
r
When the subject moves out of the AF area, the camera
immediately switches or moves the AF area to keep the
subject in focus.
s
The camera switches or moves the AF area at a gradual
pace. Effects caused by a slight movement of the subject or
by obstacles in front of the camera will be minimized.
[Moving Object
Prediction]
0
This is suited to still subjects. Effects caused by a slight
movement of the subject or by obstacles in front of the
camera will be minimized.
1 These are suited to a subject that changes its moving speed.
You can prevent defocusing caused by a sudden movement
of the subject.
2
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
92
Setting the Auto Focus Mode
Applicable modes:
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and
number of the subjects to be selected.
Press [ ].
([Face/Eye
Detection])
A person’s face, eyes, and body (the entire body or the upper half of the
body) are automatically detected.
• When the camera detects a person’s
face (A, B) or body (C), an AF area is
displayed over the detected person.
Yellow:
This is the AF area for the person to be
brought into focus. The camera
automatically selects the person.
White:
These are the AF areas for people
other than the person to be brought
into focus. This type of AF area is displayed when more than one
person is detected.
• When a person's face or eyes are detected, the eye closer to the
camera will be brought into focus.
¢
¢ The exposure will be adjusted to the face. (When [Metering Mode] is
set to [ ])
• When a person’s body is detected, it will be brought into focus.
• Eye Detection works only for the eyes inside the yellow frame (A).
• The camera can detect the faces of up to 15 people.
• To specify the person or eye to be brought into
focus, align an AF area with the desired person or
eye. You can do so easily by touching a person
indicated with an AF area. To cancel the setting,
touch [ ].
ョㄏヒ
93
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
([Tracking])
The camera keeps adjusting the focus and
exposure automatically to the specified moving
object. (Dynamic Tracking)
(When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
• Perform either of the following operations to lock
the subject to be tracked:
Button operation:
Aim the AF tracking frame D over the subject, and
press the shutter button halfway.
Touch operation:
Touch the subject.
• If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear.
• The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked (green while the
shutter button is pressed halfway).
• Lock is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed, or [ ] is touched.
([225-Area])
Up to 225 AF areas can be focused.
This is effective when a subject is not in the center
of the screen.
, etc.
([Custom Multi])
From among 225 AF areas, you can freely set the
optimum shape of the AF area for the subject.
(P95)
([1-Area])
The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area
on the screen.
([Pinpoint])
You can achieve a more precise focus on a point
that is smaller than [Ø].
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen
that lets you check the focus will be enlarged.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
94
∫ Displaying the AF area position in the magnification window (AF Point Scope)
You can temporarily display the magnification window to check the AF area position and
focus.
• When using the [ ] or [ ] mode or a mode such as [ ] ([Custom Multi]), the center area of
the screen will be displayed in the magnification window.
Press and hold [Fn4] while the recording screen is
displayed.
• The Focus Mode will change to [AFS].
When you press the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
readjusted with a smaller AF area.
• You can rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the magnification
factor.
: Magnifies/reduces the window in small steps
: Magnifies/reduces the window in large steps
• The AF area position and the magnification window position cannot be changed.
Setting the methods for displaying the magnification window
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF-Point Scope
Setting]
[Keep Enlarged
Display]
[ON]: Displays/hides the magnification window each time the appropriate
function button is pressed.
[OFF]: Displays the magnification window while the appropriate function
button is pressed and held.
[PIP Display]
[FULL]: Displays the window in full screen mode.
[PIP]: Displays the window in windowed mode.
• If the ambient temperature is high or AF Point Scope is used continuously, after [ ] is
displayed, the magnification window may be disabled to protect the camera. Wait until the
camera cools down.
• In windowed mode, you can magnify the window by approximately 3k to 6k; in full screen
mode, you can magnify the window by approximately 3k to 10k.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording in Burst Mode
(only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2 PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
– When recording in [Multi Exp.]
– When using the Digital Zoom
MENU
95
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
∫ Setting the shape of the AF area ([Custom Multi])
1 Press [ ].
2 Select a Custom Multi icon ([ ], etc.), and press 3.
3 Press 2/1 to select a setting and then press 4.
A The current shape of the AF area
4 Select AF areas.
B The selected AF areas
When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
([Horizontal
Pattern])
This shape is
convenient for taking
panning shots or
similar shots.
([Vertical
Pattern])
This shape is
convenient for
recording objects,
such as buildings.
([Central
Pattern])
This shape is
convenient when you
want to bring the
center area into focus.
//
([Custom1]/
[Custom2]/
[Custom3])
You can select a customized setting.
Button operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the position
//
Pinching in/
out
Changes the size
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: The position
is reset to the center
Second time: The size
is reset to the default
ヤピヤビヤヒ
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
96
When selecting [ ]/[ ]/[ ]
Drag your finger over the parts you want to set as AF
areas.
• To cancel the selection of a particular AF area, touch the
area again.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the AF area, and then press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
• To cancel all selections, press [DISP.].
Press [Fn1] to set.
∫ Registering the set AF area to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
1 On the screen in step
3 on P95, press 3.
2 Press 3/4 to select a destination to which the setting will be registered, and press
[MENU/SET].
∫ Restrictions on Auto Focus Mode
• The AF Mode is fixed to [Ø] in the following cases.
– When using the Digital Zoom
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
• The Auto Focus Mode is fixed to [š] when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• It cannot be set the Auto Focus Mode in the following cases.
– When recording with the Post Focus function
([Face/Eye Detection])
• If no faces or human bodies are detected, the AF Mode operates as [ ].
([Tracking])
• In situations where AF Tracking does not work correctly due to certain recording conditions,
such as when the subject is small or the location is dark, the operation of [Ø] is performed.
• [ ] cannot be used with [Time Lapse Shot].
• In the following cases, [ ] operates as [Ø].
– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/
[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– [Monochrome]/[L.Monochrome] ([Photo Style])
([225-Area]), , etc. ([Custom Multi])
• AF areas at the center are brought into focus during 6K/4K photo recording or motion picture
recording using [Continuous AF].
([Pinpoint])
• In the following case, [ ] operates as [Ø].
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
• It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases.
– [AFF]/[AFC] (Focus Mode)
Touch operation
Button operation
• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with [ ]/[ ]/[ ] back to the default
setting.
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
ヤヒヤビ
ヤピ
97
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Specifying the AF area position
∫ Creating separate AF areas for horizontal and vertical orientations
Specifying the AF area position on the setting screen P98
Specifying the AF area position with the joystick P100
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad P101
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Function P101
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [Focus Switching for
Vert / Hor]
[ON]
Memorizes separate positions for horizontal
and vertical orientations (two vertical
orientations, left and right, are available).
• The following last-specified positions will be
memorized.
– The last AF area position (when [ ], [Ø] or [ ] is used)
– The last MF Assist display position
[OFF] Sets the same setting for both horizontal and vertical orientations.
• Before moving or resizing the AF area, cancel the Touch Shutter function.
• The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when the [Metering Mode]
is set to [ ].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
98
Applicable modes:
When [š], [ ], [Ø] or [ ] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the position
and size of the AF area. With [ ], you can set the lock-on position.
1 Press [ ].
2 Select [š], [ ], [ ] or [Ø] and press 4.
3 Change the position and size of the AF area.
• With [ ], you can set the lock-on position by changing the AF area position.
• To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus when [š] has been selected, align
any of the AF areas currently indicating human subjects with the desired person or eye.
For any position where a person or eye is not located, an AF area that operates in the
same way as [Ø] will be set.
• Press [MENU/SET] or touch [ ] to cancel the AF area settings when using [š], [ ] or
[].
¢ This operation is not available for [ ].
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
Specifying the AF area position on the setting screen
When selecting [š], [ ], [ ], [Ø]
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the position
Pinching out/in
Changes the size
(in small steps if [š] or [Ø] has been selected)
¢
/ s
Changes the size
(in large steps if [š] or [Ø] has been selected)
¢
[DISP.] [Reset]
First time: The position is reset to the center
Second time: The size is reset to the default
¢
99
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
You can set the focus position precisely by enlarging the screen.
1 Press [ ].
2 Select [ ] and press 4.
3 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the focus position and then
press [MENU/SET].
4 Move [+] to the position to be in focus.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge the
picture by approximately 3k to 10k.
• You can also take pictures by touching [ ].
5 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
When selecting [ ]
Button
operation
Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves [+].
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.
Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full screen).
[DISP.] [Reset] Returns you to the screen in step 3.
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
100
Applicable modes:
1 Select the menu.
2 Display the recording screen, and move the joystick
3/4/2/1 to move the AF area.
• To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus when
using [š], align any of the AF areas currently indicating
human subjects with the desired person or eye. For any
position where a person or eye is not located, an AF area
that operates in the same way as [Ø] will be set.
• You can change the size of the AF area by rotating the front/rear dial.
• Press the joystick to switch between the default AF area
position and the position you have set.
The enlarged display will appear when [ ] ([Pinpoint]) is
set.
3 Press the shutter button halfway to set.
• Press the joystick while the recording screen is displayed
to switch between the default AF area position and the
position you have set.
Specifying the AF area position with the joystick
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Joystick Setting] > [D.FOCUS
Movement]
MENU
101
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Applicable modes:
You can move the AF area displayed on the viewfinder by
touching the monitor.
• Press the shutter button halfway to determine the focus position.
To return the focus position to the center, press [DISP.] before determining the position.
• To specify the person or eye to be brought into focus when the Auto Focus Mode is set to [š],
align any of the AF areas currently indicating human subjects with the desired person or eye.
For any position where a person or eye is not located, an AF area that operates in the same
way as [Ø] will be set.
• To cancel the AF area frame when the Auto Focus Mode is set to [š], [ ] or [ ], press
[MENU/SET].
Applicable modes:
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Pad
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch Pad AF]
[EXACT]
Moves the AF area of the
Viewfinder by touching a
desired position on the Touch
Pad.
[OFFSET]
Moves the AF area of the
viewfinder according to the
distance you drag the touch
pad.
[OFF] —
Specifying the AF area position with the Touch Function
> [Custom] > [Operation] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF]
[AF] Optimizes the focus for the touched subject.
[AF+AE] Optimizes the focus and brightness for the touched subject.
[OFF] —
MENU
MENU
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
102
∫ Optimizing the focus for the touched position ([AF])
1 Touch the subject.
2 (When [ ]/[ ]/[ ], etc./[ ] is set) Touch [Set].
(When [ ] is set) Touch the [End].
• (When [ ]/[ ]/[ ] is set) The AF area setting is cleared if you touch [ ].
∫ Optimizing the focus and brightness for a touched position ([AF+AE])
1 Touch the subject you want to optimize the
brightness for.
• The brightness optimization position is displayed on the
center of the AF area. The position follows the movement
of the AF area.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ ], which is used exclusively
for the Touch AE.
• To return the brightness optimization position and the AF
area to the center, touch [Reset].
2 Touch [Set].
• The AF area with the same function as [Ø] is displayed on the touched position.
• To cancel the focus and brightness set with [AF+AE], touch [ ] ([ ] when [Ø] is
selected).
• When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimized for the
touched position before recording takes place.
Specify the person or eye to be brought into focus when you have
selected a person indicated with an AF area.
If you have selected any location where a person or eye is not
located, move the AF area that operates in the same way as [Ø] to
the selected location to display the size and position setting screen.
The touched subject is locked.
The AF area moves to the subject and the size and position setting
screen is displayed.
, etc.
The AF area moves to the subject and the appropriate setting
screen is displayed.
The AF area moves to the subject and the size and position setting
screen is displayed.
The AF area moves to the subject and the setup screen for the
enlarged area is displayed.
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
AE
103
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Adjusting Focus Manually
Applicable modes:
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens
and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate Auto Focus.
1
Set the focus mode lever to [MF].
2
Press [ ].
• You can also perform the same operation by moving the joystick 3/4/2/1 (When
[Joystick Setting] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu is set to [D.FOCUS Movement]).
3
Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the focus position, and press [MENU/SET].
• The assist screen is displayed, enlarging the area. (MF
Assist)
• You can also enlarge the area by performing one of the
following operations:
– Rotating the focus ring
– Moving the focus lever
– Pinching out or touching the screen twice
• You can also adjust the focus position by dragging the
screen.
• To return the focus position to the center, press [DISP.].
4
Adjust the focus.
The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens.
When using an interchangeable lens
(H-ES12060/H-FS12060) with a focus ring
Rotate to A side:
Focuses on nearby
subject
Rotate to B side:
Focuses on distant
subjects
When using the interchangeable lens
having a focus lever
Move to C side:
Focuses on nearby
subject
Move to D side:
Focuses on distant
subjects
• The focusing speed varies depending on how
far you move the focus lever.
A
B
C
D
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
104
A MF Assist (enlarged screen)
B Peaking
C MF Guide
• In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])
• You can check whether the point of focus is to the near
side or to the far side. (MF Guide)
You can perform the following operations:
¢ When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these
operations after pressing
4 to display the screen that lets you set the area to be
enlarged.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge the picture by
approximately 3k to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge
the picture by approximately 3k to 10k.
When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring
Press 1: Focuses on nearby subject
Press 2: Focuses on distant subjects
A Slide bar
• Pressing and holding 2/1 will increase the
focus speed.
• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the slide
bar.
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1
¢
Dragging Moves the enlarged area.
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.
Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full
screen).
[DISP.]
¢
[Reset]
¢
The position of the enlarged area is reset to the
center.
AF
+
AF
+
105
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
5
Press the shutter button halfway.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [MENU/SET].
• If you have enlarged the picture by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever, the
assist screen will close approximately 10 seconds after the operation.
Achieving focus quickly using Auto Focus
If [AF/AE LOCK] is pressed in Manual Focus, Auto Focus will work.
• Auto Focus works at the center of the frame.
• Auto Focus also works with the following operations.
– Pressing the function button to which [AF-ON] is assigned
– Touching [ ]
– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position
you want to focus on
• This function is not available when [4K Live Cropping] is set.
• MF Assist and MF Guide may not display depending on the lens used. You can, however,
display MF Assist by directly operating the camera using the touch screen or a button.
• When [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is
enabled, you can set the position of the enlarged MF Assist display for each orientation of the
camera.
• The focus distance reference mark A is a mark used to measure
the focus distance.
Use this when taking pictures with Manual Focus or taking close-up
pictures.
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF/AE Lock] > [AF-ON]
MENU
AF
AF
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
106
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE
Lock)
Applicable modes:
Lock the focus and exposure in advance to take pictures with the same focus and
exposure settings while changing the composition.
This is useful when you want to bring an edge of the screen into focus or there is a
backlight, for example.
1
Align the screen with the subject.
2
Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus
or exposure.
• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is canceled.
• Only the exposure is locked in the default setting.
3
While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the
camera as you compose the picture and then
press shutter button fully.
A AE Lock indication
∫ Setting the functions of [AF/AE LOCK]
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter] > [AF/AE Lock]
[AE LOCK]
Only the exposure is locked.
• When the exposure is set, [AEL] is displayed.
[AF LOCK]
Only the focus is locked.
• When the subject is focused, [AFL] is displayed.
[AF/AE LOCK]
Both focus and exposure are locked.
• [AFL] and [AEL] are displayed when the focus and the exposure are
optimized.
[AF-ON] Auto Focus is performed.
• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.
• AE Lock only is effective when taking pictures with Manual Focus.
• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is
locked.
• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
0
60
2.8
AEL
AELAEL
AEL
MENU
107
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Compensating the Exposure
Applicable modes:
Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in
brightness between the subject and the background.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial to compensate the
exposure.
A Exposure Bracket
B Exposure Compensation
C [Flash Adjust.]
• You can perform the operations below while the
exposure compensation screen is displayed.
• You can switch the functions between the rear dial and the front dial by pressing [DISP.].
3
Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
Compensates the exposure
Adjusts the flash output (P160)
3/4 Sets the exposure bracket (P142)
Underexposed Properly exposed Overexposed
Compensate the exposure
towards positive.
Compensate the exposure
towards negative.
+3+3+1+1 +2+2 +3+3
-
5
-
5
-
4
-
4
-
3
-
3
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
100
+5+5+4+4
+1
+1
0
OFF
OFF
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
108
• In Manual Exposure Mode, you can compensate the exposure only when the ISO sensitivity is
set to [AUTO].
• You can set the exposure compensation value in the range between j5 EV and
i5 EV.
You can set a value between
j3 EV and i3 EV while recording motion picture or performing
recording with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus function.
• When [Auto Exposure Comp.] in [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the brightness of the
flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation.
• When the exposure compensation value falls below or exceeds the j3EV to i3 EV range,
the brightness of the recording screen will no longer change. Values outside this range will be
applied to the recording screen when the shutter button is pressed halfway or AE Lock is
performed with [AF/AE LOCK].
• The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When
[Exposure Comp. Reset] is set to [OFF])
109
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Setting the Light Sensitivity
Applicable modes:
This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set.
1
Press [ ].
2
Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the rear
dial.
• You can switch the functions between the rear dial and
the front dial by pressing [DISP.].
A [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
B ISO sensitivity
3
Rotate the front dial to set the [ISO Auto
Upper Limit Setting].
• Set the [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (or in [ISO Sensitivity
(video)] when using Creative Video Mode).
• It will work when the [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
4
Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
2
00
2
00
4040
ISO
ISO
ISOISOISO
ISOISOISOISOISOISOISO
AUTO
AUTO
ISO
ISO
LIMIT
LIMIT
AUTO
AUTO
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
110
¢1 When [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] in the [Rec] menu is set to
[AUTO].
¢2 Only when [Extended ISO] in the [Custom] ([Exposure]) menu is used.
AUTO
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness.
• Maximum [ISO3200]
¢1
(Intelligent)
The camera automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity
and shutter speed to suit the movement of the subject and
brightness of the scene to minimize the jitter of the subject.
• Maximum [ISO3200]
¢1
• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the
movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed
fully.
L.100
¢2
, from 200 to 25600 The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.
Characteristics of the ISO sensitivity
200 25600
Recording location
(recommended)
When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark
Shutter speed Slow Fast
Noise Less Increased
Jitter of the subject Increased Less
• Cannot select [ ] in the following cases:
– Shutter-Priority AE Mode
– Manual Exposure Mode
• When [High Resolution Mode] is set, the maximum setting is [ISO1600].
• When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [ISO3200].
• With Creative Video Mode, 6K/4K Photo, or Post Focus, you can set an ISO sensitivity value
that falls in the range below.
– Value range: [AUTO], [200] to [12800] ([100] to [12800] if [Extended ISO] is set)
111
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
Adjusting the White Balance
Applicable modes:
White Balance adjusts the color of white according to the light source to make the overall
color hue closer to what is seen by the eye.
1
Press [ ].
2
Rotate the rear dial or front dial to select the
White Balance.
• Setting can also be performed by rotating the control
dial.
¢ [AWB] is applied when you record motion picture or perform recording with the 6K/4K
Photo or Post Focus function.
[AWB]/
[AWBc]
Adjusting the White Balance automatically
• Under lighting such as incandescent lighting where reddish tones may
occur:
– With [AWB], reddish tones are maintained to reproduce the ambience of
the scene more accurately.
– With [AWBc], reddish tones are suppressed to reproduce the original
colors of the subject more accurately. The same tones as [AWB] may be
applied in a bright environment.
• [AWB] and [AWBc] apply the same tones under light sources where
reddish tones may not occur.
[V] When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky
[Ð] When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky
[î] When taking pictures outdoors in the shade
[Ñ] When taking pictures under incandescent lights
[]
¢
When taking pictures with the flash only
AWBc
AWBc
WB
WBWBWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWB
AWB
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
112
3
Press [ ] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
∫ Auto White Balance
Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on
a reddish or bluish tinge. Furthermore, when a multiple number of light sources are being
used or there is nothing with a color close to white, Auto White Balance may not function
properly. In a case like this, set the White Balance to a mode other than [AWB] or [AWBc].
1 [AWB] will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 Sunlight
6 White fluorescent light
7 Incandescent light bulb
8 Sunrise and sunset
9 Candlelight
KlKelvin Color Temperature
[]/
[]/
[]/
[]
Set the White Balance value. Use to match the
condition when taking photographs.
1 Press
3.
2 Place a white object such as a piece of paper
within the frame at the center of the screen, and
press [MENU/SET].
• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording screen.
• The same operation can be performed by pressing the shutter button.
• White Balance may not be set when the subject is too bright or too dark.
Set the White Balance again after adjusting to appropriate brightness.
[]/
[]/
[]/
[]
You can set the color temperature manually for
taking natural pictures in different lighting
conditions.
1 Press 3.
2 Press 3/4 to select the color temperature and
then press [MENU/SET].
• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
• You can set the White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) by rotating
the control dial.
(P144)
Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixture etc., the appropriate White Balance
will vary depending on the lighting type.
Use [AWB], [AWBc], [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ].
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5500K5500K5500K
1
2
3
4
113
4. Focus, Brightness (Exposure) and Color tone Settings
You can finely adjust the White Balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by
setting the White Balance.
1 Select the White Balance and then press 4.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to fine-adjust the White Balance.
• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White
Balance graph.
• To reset the position to the center, press [DISP.].
• You can set the White Balance Bracket by rotating the control dial.
(P144)
3 Press [MENU/SET].
Finely adjusting the White Balance
2 : [A] (AMBER: ORANGE)
1 : [B] (BLUE: BLUISH)
3 : [G] (GREEN: GREENISH)
4 : [M] (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
• If you finely adjust the White Balance to [A] (amber), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to orange.
If you finely adjust the White Balance to [B] (blue), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to blue.
• If you finely adjust the White Balance to [G] (green) or [M] (magenta), [_] (green) or [`]
(magenta) appears beside the White Balance icon on the screen.
GGG
GGG
AAA
AAAB
BBB
BBB
MMM
MMM
114
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Select a Drive Mode
Applicable modes:
You can change what the camera will do when you press the shutter button.
Rotating the drive mode dial.
[Single]
When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is
recorded.
/ [Burst] (P115)
Recordings are made in succession while the shutter
button is pressed.
[6K/4K PHOTO] (P119) Performs 6K/4K photo recording.
[Post Focus] (P130) Performs Post Focus recording.
[Self Timer] (P135)
When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes
place after the set time has elapsed.
[Time Lapse/
Animation]
(P137, 138)
Pictures are recorded with Time Lapse Shot or Stop
Motion Animation.
115
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode
Applicable modes:
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
• You can apply different Burst Mode settings to [ ] (Burst Shot 1) and [ ] (Burst Shot 2) by
setting [Burst Shot 1 Setting] and [Burst Shot 2 Setting] in the [Rec] menu.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ] (Burst Shot
1) or [ ] (Burst Shot 2).
2
Select the Burst Mode setting.
3
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst Mode.
• When [SH2] or [SH1] has been selected: If you press the
shutter button halfway first and then press it fully, you can
perform recording without a delay that occurs after it is pressed fully.
> [Rec] > [Burst Shot 1 Setting]/
[Burst Shot 2 Setting]
[SH2]
Performs super high-speed burst recording with the electronic shutter.
• The burst speed will be faster with [SH2] than with [SH1].
[SH1]
[SH2 PRE]
Performs super high-speed burst recording with the electronic shutter.
Pictures taken at the moment before the shutter button is pressed fully (a
maximum of 0.4 seconds) will be saved in addition to those taken after it is
pressed fully.
• The burst speed will be faster with [SH2 PRE] than with [SH1 PRE].
[SH1 PRE]
[H] Performs high-speed burst recording.
[M] Performs medium-speed burst recording.
[L] Performs low-speed burst recording.
• When [SH2 PRE] or [SH1 PRE] has been selected:
1 Press the shutter button halfway.
2 Press and hold the shutter button fully.
• Recording starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway. [ ] is displayed on the
recording screen.
• If approx. 1 minute elapses while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway,
press it halfway again.
When approx. 1 minute elapses while the shutter button is pressed and held halfway,
the camera will not be able to save pictures taken before the shutter button is pressed
fully.
MENU
AFSAFS
L
4:3
H
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
116
∫ Notes on Burst Mode settings
¢1 When the Focus Mode is set to [AFS] or [MF]
¢2 When the Focus Mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC]
¢3 Number of recordable pictures
¢4 When recording is performed under the test conditions specified by Panasonic.
Depending on recording conditions, the number of burst pictures that can be taken will be
reduced.
¢5 Recording stops when the indicated number of burst pictures are taken.
¢6 The burst speed will become slower halfway. However, pictures can be taken until the
capacity of the card becomes full.
• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings.
– [Picture Size]/[Quality]/[Sensitivity]/Focus Mode/[Focus/Release Priority]
Notes on super high-speed burst recording ([SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2 PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
• Shutter speeds slower than 1/60 seconds are not available.
• The aperture will be fixed during burst recording.
• Pictures taken will be recorded as a single burst picture group.
Notes on Pre-Burst ([SH2 PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
• Pictures taken before the shutter button is pressed fully are not saved in the following cases:
– When recording with the Touch Shutter
– When [Half Press Release] in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu is set to [ON]
• To protect the camera, even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not
operate when the camera's temperature has risen due to, for example, high ambient
temperature or continuous Pre-Burst recording. Wait until the camera cools down.
• Even if you press the shutter button halfway, Pre-Burst may not operate when there is
insufficient free space on the card.
[SH2]/
[SH2 PRE]
(Super
high
speed 2)
[SH1]/
[SH1 PRE]
(Super
high
speed 1)
[H]
(High
speed)
[M]
(Middle
speed)
[L]
(Low
speed)
Burst speed
(pictures/
second)
Mechanical
shutter,
Electronic
Front Curtain
——
12
¢
1
9
¢
2
72
Electronic
Shutter
60
¢
1
20
¢
2
20
12
¢
1
9
¢
2
72
Live View during Burst
Mode
None None
None
¢
1
/
Available
¢
2
Available Available
¢3
With RAW files 50
¢
5
50
¢
5
60 or more
¢
4,6
Without RAW files 50
¢
5
50
¢
5
600 or more
¢
4,6
117
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
• The table below shows the numbers of pictures that can be taken with [SH2 PRE] and
[SH1 PRE] before the shutter button is pressed fully.
∫ About the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously
When you press the shutter button halfway, the maximum number
of pictures you can take continuously will appear. You can check
the approximate number of burst pictures that can be taken.
Example: When 20 pictures can be taken: [r20]
• Once recording starts, the maximum number of pictures that can be taken continuously will
decrease.
• With [H], [M] or [L]: The recording speed slows down when [r0] appears.
With [SH2], [SH1], [SH2 PRE] or [SH1 PRE]: Burst recording stops when [r0] appears.
• When [r99+] is displayed, you can take 100 or more pictures continuously.
∫ Notes on focus in Burst Mode
The way focus is achieved varies according to the focus mode setting and the [Focus/
Release Priority] setting in the [Custom] ([Focus / Release Shutter]) menu.
¢1 When the subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture.
¢2 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.
¢3 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the
subject.
Focus Mode [SH2 PRE] [SH1 PRE]
[AFS]/[MF] 24 pictures
8 pictures
[AFF]/[AFC] 8 pictures
Focus mode [Focus/Release Priority]
[SH2]/[SH1]/
[SH2 PRE]/[SH1 PRE]/
[H]
[M]/[L]
[AFS]
[FOCUS]
At the first picture
[BALANCE]
[RELEASE]
[AFF]/[AFC]
¢1
[FOCUS] Predicted focusing
¢2
Normal focusing
¢3
[BALANCE]
Predicted focusing
¢2
[RELEASE]
[MF] — Focus set with Manual Focus
2020r20
0
2
00
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
118
∫ Notes on exposure in Burst Mode
¢ If the exposure compensation is set to a value outside the j3EV to i3 EV range, the
exposure will be fixed to the level of the first picture. (Except for when [H] is set)
Focus mode
[SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2 PRE]/
[SH1 PRE]/[H]
[M]/[L]
[AFS]
The exposure is fixed to the level of the
first picture
The exposure is adjusted for each
frame
[AFF]/[AFC]
The exposure is adjusted for each
frame
¢
[MF]
The exposure is fixed to the level of the
first picture
• It may take time to save pictures taken in Burst Mode on the card. If you take pictures
continuously while saving, the maximum number of recordable pictures decreases. For
continuous shooting, use of a high speed memory card is recommended.
• We recommend using the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional) when you want to
keep the shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode.
Not available in these cases:
• The Burst Mode is disabled in the following cases.
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
119
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Recording 6K/4K Photos
Applicable modes:
With 6K Photo, you can take a high-speed burst of pictures at 30 frames/second and save
the desired pictures, each made up of 18 million pixels (approx.), extracted from their burst
file.
With 4K Photo, you can take a high-speed burst of pictures at 60 frames/second and save
the desired pictures, each made up of 8 million pixels (approx.).
• “6K PHOTO” is a high-speed burst recording function which allows you to save pictures
extracted from images recorded with an aspect ratio for still pictures, 4:3 or 3:2, and with an
effective picture size equivalent to a particular number of pixels (approx. 18 megapixels)
produced by images with a size of 6K (approx. 6,000 (horizontal)k3,000 (vertical)).
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the picture size and burst speed.
3
Select the recording method.
> [Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] >
[Picture Size / Burst Speed]
Use (recommended) Picture size
Burst speed
(pictures/second)
[6K 18M] For a larger picture size
[6K] (18M)
[4:3]: (4992k3744)
[3:2]: (5184k3456)
30
[4K H 8M] For a faster burst speed
[4K] (8M)
[4:3]: (3328k2496)
[3:2]: (3504k2336)
[16:9]: (3840k2160)
[1:1]: (2880k2880)
60
[4K 8M] For a long burst 30
> [Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] > [Rec Method]
MENU
MENU
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
120
¢1 If [Picture Size / Burst Speed] is set to [6K 18M] or [4K H 8M]:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 10 minutes.
If [Picture Size / Burst Speed] is set to [4K 8M]:
Recording stops when the continuous recording time exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
– When using an SDHC memory card, you can continue the recording of a 6K/4K photo
without interruption even if the file size exceeds 4 GB, but its burst file will be divided into
smaller files for recording and playback.
– With an SDXC memory card, you can save a burst file size exceeding 4 GB as a single file.
¢2 Audio is not played back when you perform playback with the camera.
4
Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst]
¢1
For capturing the best shot of a
fast-moving subject (e.g., sports,
aeroplanes, trains)
Burst recording is performed while the
shutter button is pressed and held.
The shutter sound will be heard repeatedly.
A Press and hold
B Recording is performed
Audio recording: Not available
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
¢1
“S/S” is an
abbreviation of Start/
Stop.
For capturing unpredictable photo
opportunities (e.g., plants, animals,
children)
Burst recording starts when the shutter
button is pressed and stops when
pressed again. Start and stop tones will
be heard.
C Start (First)
D Stop (Second)
E Recording is performed
Audio recording: Available
¢2
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Pre-Burst]
For recording as needed whenever a
photo opportunity arises (e.g., the
moment when a ball is thrown)
Burst recording is performed for
approximately 1 second before and after
the moment that the shutter button is
pressed. The shutter sound will be heard only once.
F Approximately 1 second
G Recording is performed
Recording length:
Approximately 2 seconds
Audio recording: Not available
121
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
5
Record a 6K/4K photo.
• If you are using Auto Focus, [Continuous AF] will work during recording. Focus will be
adjusted continuously.
• The camera will perform burst recording of a 6K/4K photo and saves it as a 6K/4K burst file with
a [Rec Format] setting of [MP4].
• When [Auto Review] is enabled, the picture selection screen will be displayed automatically. To
continue recording, press the shutter button halfway to display the recording screen.
• For information on how to select and save pictures from recorded 6K/4K burst files, refer to
P125.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst]
1 Press the shutter button halfway.
2 Press and hold the shutter button fully for as
long as you want to perform recording.
A Available recording time
• Press the button fully slightly in advance. Recording
starts approximately 0.5 seconds after it has been pressed fully.
• If you remove your finger from the shutter button immediately after the
start of recording, up to a period of approximately 1.5 seconds after
the moment that the finger has been removed may be recorded.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Burst(S/S)]
1 Press the shutter button fully to start recording.
2 Press the shutter button fully again to stop
recording.
B Available recording time
Adding markers to select and save pictures
You can add markers if you press [Fn2] during recording.
(Up to 40 markers per recording) When selecting and saving pictures
from a 6K/4K burst file, you can skip to the positions where you added
markers.
[]/[]/[]
[6K/4K Pre-Burst]
Press the shutter button fully.
C Number of recordings that can be made
• Auto Focus adjusts focus continuously, and except in
Manual Exposure Mode, it also adjusts exposure
continuously.
• Images may not be displayed as smoothly as when recording with the
normal recording screen.
Recording tips
In situations where you want to lock focus and exposure, such as
when the subject is not at the center, use [AF/AE LOCK].
(P106)
• To reduce camera shake, we recommend that you use a tripod and shutter remote control
(DMW-RSL1: optional) when using [Light Composition].
0
5
m
0404
s
5
m
04
s
0
5
m
0404
s
5
m
04
s
0
120012001200
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
122
∫ Setting Pre-Burst Recording ([6K/4K Burst]/[6K/4K Burst(S/S)])
The camera starts recording approximately 1 second before the shutter button is pressed
fully, so you will not miss a photo opportunity.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
∫ To change the aspect ratio
Selecting [Aspect Ratio] in the [Rec] menu allows you to change the aspect ratio for 6K/4K
photos.
∫ To record the subject with reduced blur
You can reduce the blur of the subject by setting a faster shutter speed.
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Set the shutter speed by rotating the rear dial or the front dial.
∫ Shutter sound for recording
• When using [6K/4K Burst] or [6K/4K Pre-Burst], you can change the electronic shutter sound
settings in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone].
• When recording with [6K/4K Burst(S/S)], you can set the start/stop tone volume in [Beep
Volume].
• High-speed burst recording can be used quietly when used in combination with [Silent Mode].
> [Rec] > [6K/4K PHOTO] > [Pre-Burst Recording]
• When this function is enabled, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• Auto Focus operation settings and menus that cannot be set while this function is in use are
the same as those during [6K/4K Pre-Burst] operation.
Battery drainage and camera temperature
• When the ambient temperature is high or 6K/4K photo recording is performed
continuously, the camera may display [ ] and recording may stop. If you are using
[6K/4K Pre-Burst], the setting will switch to [6K/4K Burst] and recording will stop. Wait
until the camera cools down.
• When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster and
the camera temperature rises. Use these functions only when recording with them.
Notes on the 6K/4K Photo function
• Approximate shutter speed for outdoor recording in fine weather conditions:
1/1000 seconds or faster.
• If you increase the shutter speed, the ISO sensitivity becomes higher, which may
increase the noise on the screen.
MENU
123
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫ Scenes not suitable
Recording in extremely bright locations or indoors
When subjects are recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent/LED
lighting, the color tone or brightness of the image may change, or horizontal stripes may
appear on the screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
Subjects that are moving fast in the horizontal direction
If you record a subject moving fast in the horizontal direction, the subject in the recorded
pictures may appear distorted.
∫ The camera’s setup for the 6K/4K Photo function
The camera’s setup is automatically optimized for 6K/4K photo recording.
• The following [Rec] menu items are fixed to the settings below:
• 6K/4K burst files are recorded with the settings indicated below:
Settings in the [Motion Picture] menu are not applied to 6K/4K burst files.
¢ Switches to a setting that matches the [Picture Size / Burst Speed] setting.
• When recording with the 6K/4K Photo function, the ranges for the following functions differ from
the ones available for taking pictures:
– Shutter speed: 1/30th (1/60th when [4K H 8M] is set) to 1/16000th
– [Min. Shtr Speed]: [1/1000] to [1/30] ([1/60] when [4K H 8M] is set)
– Exposure Compensation: j3EV to
i3EV
– ISO sensitivity: [AUTO], [200] to [12800] ([100] to [12800] when [Extended ISO] is set)
[Picture Size]
¢
[6K] (18M)
[4K] (8M)
[Quality] [A]
[Shutter Type] [ESHTR]
[Rec Format] [MP4] [Continuous AF] [ON]
[Rec Quality]
¢
[6K/200M/30p]
[4K/150M/60p]
[4K/100M/30p]
[Luminance Level]
[0-1023] (for 6K
photo recording)
[0s255] (for 4K
photo recording)
• When recording with the 6K/4K Photo function, the following functions are disabled:
–Flash
– Bracket Recording
– Program Shift
– Focus mode (AFF)
– [AF Mode] ( )
– [MF Assist] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst] only)
– White Balance ( )
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
124
• The following menu items are disabled:
[Intelligent Auto] [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]
[Creative Control] [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
[Rec]
[Picture Size]/[Quality]/[AFS/AFF]/
[AF Custom Setting(Photo)] ([6K/4K Burst(S/S)] only)/
[Color Space]/[Flash]/[Long Shtr NR]/[Shutter Type]/[Shutter Delay]/
[Bracket]/[HDR]
[Custom] [Rec Area]/[Face Recog.]/[Profile Setup]
[Setup] [Economy] ([6K/4K Pre-Burst] only)
• When [6K 18M] is set, [Aspect Ratio] cannot be set to [16:9] or [1:1].
• The following changes occur when recording 6K/4K photos:
– [Location] in [Travel Date] cannot be recorded.
– [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] in [Filter Settings] is not available.
– It is not possible to use the HDMI output during recording.
• If you use HDMI output, settings will be adjusted as follows:
– [6K/4K Pre-Burst] will be switched to [6K/4K Burst].
– The [Pre-Burst Recording] setting will be switched from [ON] to [OFF].
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] is not available when [6K 18M] is set.
[ZOOM] is not available when [4K H 8M] or [4K 8M] is set.
• [Digital Zoom] is not available when [6K 18M] is set.
• You cannot superimpose recording dates using [Time Stamp Rec].
• When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst], [Step Zoom] in [Power Zoom Lens] is disabled.
• Scene Detection in Intelligent Auto Mode works the same way as when recording motion
pictures.
• When the drive mode is set to 6K/4K Photo, it is not possible to take pictures while recording
motion picture. (Only when [ ] ([Photo Priority]) is set)
Not available in these cases:
• The 6K/4K Photo function is disabled when using the following settings:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
125
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Selecting pictures from 6K/4K burst file and
saving
1
Select an image with the [ ] or [ ] icon on the
playback screen, and press 3.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ]
or [ ].
• If the image was recorded with [6K/4K Pre-Burst], proceed to step
3.
3
Drag the frames to select the frame you want
to save as a picture.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing
2/1.
• To continuously rewind/forward frame-by-frame, touch
and hold [ ]/[ ].
4
Touch [ ] or [ ] to save the picture.
• A confirmation screen will be displayed.
2
Drag the slide bar to make a rough selection
of scenes.
• For information on how to use the slide view screen, refer
to
P127.
• If the image was recorded with [6K/4K Burst] or [6K/4K
Burst(S/S)], you can select its scenes on the 6K/4K burst
playback screen by touching [ ] (Fn1).
(P128)
Slide view screen
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
• The picture will be saved with recording information (Exif information), including its shutter
speed, aperture and ISO sensitivity information.
Fn1
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
126
∫ Saving pictures taken with the 6K/4K Photo function at once ([6K/4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving])
You can save pictures of a 6K/4K burst file that were extracted from any 5 second period
at once.
1 Select the menu.
2 Press 2/1 to select the 6K/4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
• If the burst time is 5 seconds or less, all frames will be saved as pictures.
3 Select the first frame of the pictures to be saved at once.
• Select the frame in the same way as you select pictures from a 6K/4K burst file.
• Pictures will be saved as a group of Burst Mode pictures in JPEG format.
∫ Correcting distortion in pictures ([Reduce Rolling Shutter])
The camera corrects distortion in pictures caused by the electronic shutter (rolling shutter
effect) when you save them.
1 On the save confirmation screen in step 4 on P125, touch [Reduce Rolling
Shutter].
• Return to the confirmation screen if it cannot produce any correction result.
2 Check the correction result, and touch [Save].
• You can check corrected/uncorrected versions of the picture by touching [Set/Cancel].
∫ Reducing the noise produced by high sensitivity ([6K/4K PHOTO Noise
Reduction])
When saving pictures, reduce the noise produced during recording by high ISO sensitivity.
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
> [Playback] > [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving]
Correcting 6K/4K Photos After Recording (Post-Recording Refinement)
• The angle of view of the corrected picture may become narrower.
• Depending on the movement of subjects on the edges of the frame, the corrected picture may
look unnatural.
• You may not be able to correct for images recorded with other devices.
> [Playback] > [6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction]
• This function is not applied to pictures saved with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving].
• You may not be able to applied for images recorded with other devices.
MENU
MENU
127
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
∫ Navigating the slide view screen
• During marker operation, you can skip to the markers that you added or the beginning or end of
the 6K/4K burst file. Touch [ ] to return to the original operation.
Operations during selecting pictures
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1/
Dragging/
/
Selects a frame.
• To change the frames displayed in slide view, select the
frame at the left/right end, and touch [ ] or [ ].
2/1
Press and hold
/
Touch and hold
Continuously rewinds/forwards frame-by-frame.
s
Touching/
Dragging
Selects the frame to be displayed.
Pinching out/in
Enlarges/reduces the display.
s
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display.
(during enlarged display)
3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
[Fn1] Displays the 6K/4K burst playback screen.
s Switches to marker operation.
s / Adds/deletes a marker.
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [OFF]>[ON] ([LOW]) > [ON]
([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] , Saves the picture
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
1 Moves to the next marker.
2 Moves to the previous marker.
Fn1
Position of the displayed
frame
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
128
∫ Navigating the 6K/4K burst playback screen
During pause During continuous playback
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3 / Continuous playback/Pause (during continuous playback).
4 / Continuous rewind/Pause (during continuous rewind).
1/ / Fast forward/Frame-by-frame forward (during pause).
2/ / Fast rewind/Frame-by-frame rewind (during pause).
s
Touching/
Dragging
Selects the frames to be displayed (during pause).
Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the display (during pause).
s
Selects a frame while maintaining the enlarged display
(during enlarged display).
3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
[Fn1] Displays the slide view screen (during pause).
s Switches to marker operation.
s / Adds/deletes a marker.
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with color. ([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [OFF]>[ON] ([LOW]) > [ON]
([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] , Saves the picture (during pause).
• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal
view.
• To select and save pictures from 6K/4K burst files on a PC, use the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
Please note that it is not possible to edit a 6K/4K burst file as a motion picture.
• To play back and edit 6K/4K burst files recorded with [6K 18M] on a PC, a high-performance
PC environment is required. We recommend choosing and saving pictures with the camera.
Fn1
129
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
• 6K burst files recorded with [6K 18M] are output to a TV connected through HDMI at a
resolution of [4K].
• Set [HDMI Mode (Play)] to either [AUTO] or a setting with a resolution of [4K].
When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture, select [AUTO].
• If you display 6K/4K burst files on a TV connected to the camera, they will be displayed only on
the 6K/4K burst playback screen.
• Panasonic TVs equipped with SD card slots cannot directly play back 6K/4K burst files from the
SD card.
Selecting and saving pictures on the TV screen
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
130
Controlling Focus After Recording (Post Focus/
Focus Stacking)
Applicable modes:
The camera can perform Burst recording in the same picture quality as 6K/4K photo
recording while automatically shifting the focus to different areas.
After the recording, you can select the desired focus point for the picture to be saved.
This function is suited for recording still objects.
• We recommend that you use a tripod when recording images to be used for Focus Stacking.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the picture size.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
6K/4K burst recording while
automatically shifting the
focus.
Touch the desired focus
point.
A picture with the desired
focus point is made.
> [Rec] > [Post Focus]
Picture size Description
[6K 18M]
[6K] (18M)
[4:3]: (4992k3744)
[3:2]: (5184k3456)
Larger-sized pictures can be created.
[4K 8M]
[4K] (8M)
[4:3]: (3328k2496)
[3:2]: (3504k2336)
[16:9]: (3840k2160)
[1:1]: (2880k2880)
The display can be enlarged using [Ex.
Tele Conv.].
MENU
131
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
4
Decide on the composition, and press the
shutter button halfway.
• Auto Focus will detect focus areas on the screen.
(Excluding the edges of the screen)
• If no areas on the screen can be brought into focus, the focus display (
A
) will flash.
Recording is not possible in this case.
5
Press the shutter button fully to start
recording.
• The focus point changes automatically while recording.
When the icon (
B
) disappears, recording automatically
ends.
• A motion picture will be recorded with [Rec Format] set to [MP4]. (Audio will not be
recorded.)
• When [Auto Review] is enabled, a screen that lets you select the desired focus area will
be displayed.
(P132)
∫ Limitations on the Post Focus function
• Since recording is performed in the same image quality as 6K/4K photos, certain limitations
apply to recording functions and menu settings. For details, refer to “The camera’s setup for the
6K/4K Photo function” on
P123.
• In addition to the limitations of the 6K/4K Photo function, the following limitations apply to the
Post Focus function:
– Manual Focus operation is disabled.
– Auto Focus Mode is disabled.
– Motion pictures cannot be recorded.
– [Digital Zoom]/[Time Stamp Rec] is disabled.
– The following [Custom] menu items are disabled:
[Shutter AF]
From the time you press the shutter button halfway until the end of recording:
• Maintain the same distance to the subject and the same composition.
• Do not operate the zoom.
About camera temperature
• If the surrounding temperature is high, recording is performed continuously with the Post
Focus function, or the temperature of the camera rises, [ ] may be displayed and
recording may stop halfway through to protect the camera. Wait until the camera cools
down.
6K
4:3
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
132
1 Select an image with the [ ] icon on the playback screen, and
press 3.
• You can also perform the same operation by touching the icon [ ].
2 Touch the desired focus area.
• If a picture that is in focus is not available for the selected
area, a red frame will be displayed. You cannot save a
picture in this case.
• You cannot select the edges of the screen.
• You can fine-adjust the focus by dragging the slide bar
during enlarged display. (You can also perform the same
operation by pressing 2/1.)
3 Touch [ ] to save the picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format.
Not available in these cases:
• The Post Focus function is disabled when using the following settings:
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When [Multi Exp.] is set
Selecting the desired focus area and saving a picture
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1/
/
Touching
Selects a focus area.
• It cannot be selected during enlarged display.
Enlarges the display.
Reduces the display (during enlarged display).
[Fn1]
Switches to the Focus Stacking function.
(P133)
s
In-focus portions are highlighted with color.
([Peaking])
• Switches in order of [OFF]>[ON] ([LOW]) >
[ON] ([HIGH]).
[MENU/SET] Saves the picture.
• You cannot choose and save the picture from a TV screen even if the camera is connected to
a TV through an HDMI cable.
Fn1
133
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
A Focus: closer
B Focus: farther away
1 Touch [ ] in step 2 of “Selecting the desired focus area and saving a picture”.
• You can also perform the same operation by pressing [Fn1].
2 Touch the merging method.
3 (When [Range Merging] is selected)
Touch the desired focus area.
• To cancel the selection, touch the focus area again.
• To select multiple areas, drag the screen.
Merging multiple pictures to widen the focus range (Focus Stacking)
[Auto Merging]
Automatically selects pictures that are suited to be merged, and
merges them into a single picture.
• Priority will be given to pictures with closer focus.
[Range Merging] Merges pictures with specified focus areas into a single picture.
• Specify at least two areas.
• In-focus areas between the two areas will also be
selected, and the combined in-focus area will be indicated.
• Gray areas indicate areas that may, if selected, cause the
merged picture to look unnatural and areas that cannot be
selected.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Selects an area.
[Fn1] [Set/Cancel] Specifies/cancels an area.
[DISP.]
[All]
Selects all areas.
(Before selecting areas)
[Reset]
Cancels all selections.
(After selecting areas)
[MENU/SET]
Merges pictures and saves
the resulting picture.
Fn1
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW&DQFHO
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
Fn1
6HW&DQFHO
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
134
4 Touch [ ] to merge the pictures and save the resulting picture.
• The picture will be saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the
original picture with the closest focus distance, including the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO
sensitivity, will also be recorded to the new picture.
• The camera may automatically correct the misalignments of pictures caused by camera
shake. If they are corrected, the angle of view becomes slightly narrower when pictures are
merged.
• An unnatural picture may be created if a subject moves during recording or the distance
between subjects is great.
• Very defocused pictures, such as those recorded with a macro lens, may be merged into an
unnatural picture. If you perform recording with a larger aperture value in Aperture-Priority AE
Mode or Manual Exposure Mode, the resulting picture may look less unnatural.
• You may not be able to use Focus Stacking for images recorded with other devices.
135
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer
Applicable modes:
1
Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2
Press the shutter button halfway to focus
and then press it fully to take the picture.
• Focus and exposure will be set when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.
• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording starts.
∫ Setting the self-timer
> [Rec] > [Self Timer]
Picture is taken 10 seconds after shutter is pressed.
After 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 seconds intervals.
Picture is taken 2 seconds after shutter is pressed.
• When using a tripod, etc., this setting is a convenient way to avoid the jitter caused by
pressing the shutter button.
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
Not available in these cases:
• It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases.
– When [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Multi Exp.]
• Self-timer is disabled in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [High Resolution Mode]
MENU
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
136
Taking Pictures with Time Lapse Shot/Stop
Motion Animation
Applicable modes:
You can take pictures with Time Lapse Shot or Stop Motion
Animation. In addition, the pictures taken can be combined
into a motion picture.
• Set the date and time settings in advance.
(P38)
∫ To display the setup screen before recording
1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2 Display the setup screen.
¢ The screen selected with [Time Lapse/Animation] in the recording menu will be
displayed. (The screen will be displayed only when you press [MENU/SET] for the first
time after switching the drive mode dial to [ ].)
∫ To switch between Time Lapse Shot and Stop Motion Animation
Switch the [Mode] setting in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Rec] menu.
• Recorded pictures are displayed as group pictures.
• If you set [Double Slot Function] to [Relay Rec] and record pictures to more than one card, the
resulting pictures will be recorded into separate groups. In this case, a continuous motion
picture cannot be created.
Button operation Touch operation
[MENU/SET]
¢
> [MENU/SET] /
137
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
The camera can automatically take pictures of subjects such as animals or plants as time
elapses and create a motion picture.
1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2 Display the setup screen.
• Switch to [Time Lapse Shot] if it is not selected. (P136)
• Recording may not be consistent with the set recording interval or the set number of
pictures depending on recording conditions.
3 Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
• The recording screen will be displayed. You can also perform the
same operation by pressing [ ] until the recording screen is
displayed.
4 Press the shutter button fully.
• The recording starts automatically.
• During recording standby, the power will turn off automatically if no operation is performed
for a certain period. The Time Lapse Shot is continued even with the power turned off.
When the recording start time arrives, the power turns on automatically.
To turn on the power manually, press the shutter button halfway.
• Operations during recording standby (The camera is turned on)
• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be displayed, asking whether to
proceed to create a motion picture.
To create a motion picture, select [Yes].
For information on creating motion pictures, refer to
P140.
Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals ([Time Lapse Shot])
[Start Time]
[Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.
[Start Time
Set]
Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can be set.
2/1: Select the item (hour/minute)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
[Shooting
Interval]/
[Image Count]
The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.
2/1: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
[Fn2]
Displays a selection screen that lets you pause or stop
the recording.
Displays a selection screen that lets you resume or
stop the recording (during pause).
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
138
∫ Changing the Time Lapse Shot settings
You can change the settings in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Rec] menu.
A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures together.
1 Set the drive mode dial to [ ].
2 Display the setup screen. (P136)
• Switch to [Stop Motion Animation] if it is not selected.
(P136)
3 Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
• The recording screen will be displayed. You can also
perform the same operation by pressing [ ] until the
recording screen is displayed.
• This function is not for use in a security camera.
• [Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– Turning the camera off
During [Time Lapse Shot], you can replace the battery and the card, and then restart by
turning on this unit. (Note that pictures taken after the restart will be saved as a separate set of
group pictures) Turn off this unit when replacing the battery.
• When [Shooting Interval] is set to a longer value, if the camera turns off automatically while
waiting for the next recording, we recommend that you use Time Lapse Shot in Auto Focus
Mode.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [High Resolution Mode]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
Creating Stop Motion Pictures ([Stop Motion Animation])
[Auto Shooting]
[ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.
[OFF] This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
[Shooting Interval]
(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])
2/1: Select the item (second)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
AFS
AFS
L
4:3
139
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
4 Press the shutter button fully.
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
5 Move the subject to decide on the composition.
• Repeat recording in the same way.
• If this unit is turned off while recording, a message for
resuming the recording is displayed when the camera is
turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.
6 Touch [ ] to end the recording.
• It can also be ended by selecting [Time Lapse/Animation]
from the [Rec] menu and then pressing [MENU/SET].
• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on the
confirmation screen.
(If [Pause] has been selected, press the shutter button
fully to resume the recording.)
• After the recording stops, a confirmation screen will be
displayed, asking whether to proceed to create a motion picture.
To create a motion picture, select [Yes].
For information on creating motion pictures, refer to
P140.
∫ Changing the settings of Stop Motion Animation
You can change the settings in [Time Lapse/Animation] in the [Rec] menu.
∫ Adding pictures to the Stop Motion Animation group
Selecting [Add to Picture Group] in step
2 will display group pictures recorded with [Stop
Motion Animation].
Select a set of group pictures, and then press [MENU/SET].
Recording materials skillfully
• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them as
reference for the amount of movement.
• To check the recorded pictures, press [(].
Unnecessary pictures can be deleted by pressing [ ].
To return to the recording screen, press [(] again.
• Recording takes time under certain recording conditions, such as when the flash is used for
recording. Automatic recording, as a result, may not take place at set intervals.
• A picture cannot be selected from [Add to Picture Group] when it is the only one that was
taken.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [High Resolution Mode]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
30
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
140
To create motion pictures after taking pictures, follow the steps below.
1 Select the methods for creating a motion picture.
• The recording format is set to [MP4].
2 Press 3/4 to select [OK] and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can also create motion pictures using [Time Lapse Video]
(P248) or [Stop Motion
Video]
(P248) in the [Playback] menu.
Creating motion pictures from recorded pictures
[Rec Quality] Sets the quality of a motion picture.
[Frame Rate]
Sets the number of frames per second.
The larger the number is, the smoother the motion picture will be.
[Sequence]
[NORMAL]:
Splices pictures together in recording order.
[REVERSE]:
Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
• When creating motion pictures with a [Rec Quality] setting of [4K], recording times are limited
to 29 minutes and 59 seconds.
– When using an SDHC Memory Card, you cannot create motion pictures with a file size
exceeding 4 GB.
– When using an SDXC Memory Card, you can create motion pictures with a file size
exceeding 4 GB.
• A motion picture with a [Rec Quality] setting of [FHD] cannot be created if the recording time
exceeds 29 minutes and 59 seconds or the file size exceeds 4 GB.
141
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Taking Pictures While Adjusting a Setting
Automatically (Bracket Recording)
Applicable modes:
You can take multiple pictures while automatically adjusting a setting by pressing the
shutter button.
1
Select the menu.
2
Press 3/4 to select [More Settings] and then press [MENU/SET].
• For information on [More Settings], refer to the page that describes each function.
• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
3
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• When Exposure Bracket is selected, the bracket display flashes until all of the pictures
you have set are taken. If you change the bracket settings or turn off the camera before
all of the pictures you have set are taken, the camera restarts recording from the first
picture.
∫ To cancel [Bracket Type]
Select [OFF] in step
1.
> [Rec] > [Bracket]> [Bracket Type]
Exposure Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the exposure.
(P142)
Aperture Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the aperture.
(P143)
• Available in Aperture-Priority AE Mode or when
the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] in Manual
Exposure Mode.
Focus Bracket
Press the shutter button to perform recording while
adjusting the focus position.
(P143)
White Balance Bracket
Press the shutter button once to take three pictures
with different white balance settings automatically.
(P144)
White Balance Bracket
(Color Temperature)
Press the shutter button once to take three pictures
with different White Balance Color Temperature
values automatically.
(P144)
• Available when the White Balance is set to [ ],
[ ], [ ] or [ ].
MENU
1
2
3
4
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
142
∫ About [More Settings] (step 2 in P141)
¢ Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the
shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures
are taken.
[Step]: [3•1/3], [Sequence]: [0/s/r]
Not available in these cases:
• Bracket recording is disabled in the following cases.
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording in Burst Mode (only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2
PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
• White Balance Bracket and White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature) are disabled in the
following cases:
– Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
– Creative Control Mode
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
Exposure Bracket
[Step]
Sets the number of pictures to be taken and the exposure
compensation range.
[3•1/3] (Takes three pictures with an interval of 1/3 EV) to [7•1]
(Takes seven pictures with an interval of 1 EV)
[Sequence] Sets the order in which pictures are taken.
[Single Shot Setting]
¢
[ ]: Takes one picture each time you press the shutter button.
[ ]: Takes all the pictures set to be taken when you press the
shutter button once.
1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture
d0EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV
• When taking pictures using Exposure Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value,
the pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value.
143
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
Recording Mode:
∫ About [More Settings] (step
2 in P141)
• When using burst recording, if you press and hold the shutter button, recording will be
performed until a specified number of pictures are taken.
The available aperture values vary depending on the lens.
Example: when using the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060)
When the initial position is set to F8.0:
1 first picture, 2 second picture, 3 third picture... 7 seventh picture
∫ About [More Settings] (step
2 in P141)
¢ Not available for burst recording. When using burst recording, if you press and hold the
shutter button, recording will be performed continuously until a specified number of pictures
are taken.
A Focus: closer
B Focus: farther away
1 first picture, 2 second picture... 5 fifth picture...
Aperture Bracket
[Image Count]
[3], [5]: Takes a specified number of pictures with different aperture
values within the range based on the initial aperture value.
[ALL]: Takes pictures using all aperture values.
Focus Bracket
[Step]
Sets the interval between focus positions.
• The distance by which the focus position moves in each step will be
shorter if the initial position is closer to a subject, and conversely if the
initial position is farther from a subject, the distance will be longer.
[Image Count]
¢
Sets the number of pictures to be taken.
[Sequence]
[0/s/r]: Alternately moves the focus position closer and farther away
within the range centered on the initial position as you take pictures.
[0/r]: Moves the focus position farther away from the initial position as
you take pictures.
[Sequence]: [0/s/r] [Sequence]: [0/r]
4.02.8 5.6 8.0 11 16 22
・・・・・・
・・・
5. 6K/4K Photo and Drive Settings
144
∫ About [More Settings] (step 2 in P141)
Rotate the control dial to adjust the correction range,
and press [MENU/SET].
: Horizontal ([A] to [B])
: Vertical ([G] to [M])
• You can also set the correction range by touching [ ]/[ ]/
[]/[].
∫ About [More Settings] (step 2 in P141)
Rotate the control dial to adjust the correction range,
and press [MENU/SET].
• You can also set the correction range by touching [ ]/[ ].
• Pictures taken with Focus Bracket are displayed as a set of group pictures.
• If you set [Double Slot Function] to [Relay Rec] and record pictures to more than one card, the
resulting pictures will be displayed as separate groups.
White Balance Bracket
White Balance Bracket (Color Temperature)
GGG
GGG
AAA
AAAB
BBB
BBB
MMM
MMM
±300K
5500K
5500K
5500K
145
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Image Stabilizer
The camera can activate either the In-Lens Image Stabilizer or In-Body Image Stabilizer, or
it can activate both of them and reduce jitter even more effectively. (Dual I.S. Mode)
Dual I.S.2 ( , , ), which provides more effective correction, is also supported.
• The image stabilizers to be activated differ depending on your lens. The icon for the currently
activated image stabilizer is displayed on the recording screen.
¢ When [E-Stabilization (Video)] in [Stabilizer] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON].
When taking pictures
When recording
motion pictures
Panasonic lenses compatible with Dual I.S.
Mode
(Based on the Micro Four Thirds System
standard)
• For the latest information on compatible
lenses, please refer to our website.
(P19)
• If the [ ] or [ ] icon is not
displayed on the recording screen even when
a compatible lens is used, update the lens
firmware to the latest version.
(P19)
Lens + Body
(Dual I.S.)
(///)
Lens + Body
(Dual I.S.) ( / ),
5-Axis Hybrid
(/)
¢
Lenses compatible with the image stabilizer
function
(Based on the Micro Four Thirds System
standard/Four Thirds System standard)
Lens or Body
(/)
Lens or Body
(),
5-Axis Hybrid
()
¢
Lenses not compatible with the image
stabilizer function
(Based on the Micro Four Thirds System
standard/Four Thirds System standard)
Body ( / )
Body ( ),
5-Axis Hybrid
()
¢
When using a Leica lens mount adaptor
(optional) or mount adaptor made by
another manufacturer
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
146
Applicable modes:
• When using an interchangeable lens with O.I.S. switch (such as H-ES12060), stabilizer
function is activated if the O.I.S. switch of the lens is set to [ON]. ([ ] is set at the time of
purchase.)
Preventing jitter (camera shake)
When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [Stabilizer], a tripod, the self-timer or the shutter
remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional).
• Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the
moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.
We recommend using a tripod.
– Slow Sync. – Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction
– When you set to a slow shutter speed
> [Rec] > [Stabilizer]
[Operation
Mode]
[]
([Normal])
Camera shake is corrected for up/down,
left/right, and rotational movements.
[]
([Panning])
Camera shake is corrected for up/down
movements.
This mode is ideal for panning (a method of
taking pictures which involves turning the
camera to track the movements of a
subject which continues to move in a fixed direction).
[OFF]
[Stabilizer] does not work. ([ ])
• When using a lens with an O.I.S. switch, set the switch to
[OFF].
[E-Stabilization
(Video)]
Jitter during motion picture recording is corrected along the vertical,
horizontal, roll, pitch, and yaw axes by making use of the In-Lens Image
Stabilizer, In-Body Image Stabilizer, and Electronic Image Stabilizer. (5-Axis
Hybrid Image Stabilizer)
[ON]/[OFF]
• When [ON] is selected, the angle of view of recorded motion pictures may
become narrower.
MENU
147
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
1 Select the menu.
2 Enter a focal length.
2/1: Select the item (digit); 3/4: Setting
• A focal length ranging from 0.1 mm to 1000 mm can be
set.
3 Press [MENU/SET].
∫ Registering a focal length
1 Perform step 2 in “Setting the focal length of a lens”.
2 Press 1 to select the focal length to be overwritten
and then press [DISP.].
• Up to 3 focal length settings can be registered.
∫ Setting a registered focal length
On the screen in step
2 of “Setting the focal length of a lens”, press 2/1 to select
the registered focal length and then press [MENU/SET].
[I.S. Lock
(Video)]
Allows you to enhance the image stabilization effect during motion picture
recording. This effect can keep the motion blur in the composition minimal
when you want to perform recording from a fixed perspective.
[ON]/[OFF]
• This effect works only during recording. [ ] is displayed on the
recording screen.
• To change the composition during recording, set the effect to [OFF]
first, and then move the camera. Use the appropriate function button to
change the setting during recording.
(P60)
• In situations where the focal length becomes greater, such as when a
telephoto lens is attached, the stabilization effect will be weaker.
• The stabilization effect may be weak depending on the lens used.
[Focal Length
Set]
If the focal length is not set automatically, you can set it manually.
• When a manually selected focal length is set, a confirmation screen asking
you to change the focal length setting is displayed after you turn on the
camera. Selecting [Yes] allows you to set [Focal Length Set] in [Stabilizer].
Setting the focal length of a lens
> [Rec] > [Stabilizer] > [Focal Length Set]
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
148
• The Image Stabilizer may produce operational sound or cause vibration during its
operation, but these are not malfunctions.
• It is recommended to disable the Image Stabilizer when using a tripod.
• The stabilizer function may not be effective in the following cases.
Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button.
– When there is a lot of jitter
– When the zoom magnification is high
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When taking pictures while following a moving subject
– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places
• The panning effect in [ ] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.
– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day
– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100th of a second
– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly (The
background will not become a blur)
– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily
Not available in these cases:
• In the following cases, the [Stabilizer] will switch to [ ] (Normal), even if it is set to [ ]
(Panning):
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
• In the following case, the [Stabilizer] will switch from [ ] to [ ] even when a compatible
lens is being used:
– When [High Speed Video] is set
• The 5-Axis Hybrid Image Stabilizer function is not available in the following cases:
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [High Speed Video] is set
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
• The Image Stabilizer is not available when [High Resolution Mode] is set.
149
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Taking Pictures with the Zoom
Applicable modes:
You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record
landscapes, etc.
Optical zoom
T side: Enlarges distant subject
W side: Widens angle of view
Interchangeable lens
with a zoom ring
Rotate the zoom ring.
Interchangeable lens
that supports the
power zoom
(electrically operated
zoom)
Move the zoom lever.
(The zoom speed varies depending on
how far you move the lever.)
• If you assign [Zoom Control] to a function
button, you can operate the optical zoom
slowly by pressing 2/1 or fast by
pressing 3/4.
For information on how to operate, refer to step
2 and the
subsequent steps on
P151.
Interchangeable lens
that does not support
the zoom
The optical zoom is not available.
T
W
T
W
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
150
Applicable modes:
Extended Tele Conversion enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged without
deteriorating the picture quality.
• Set the picture size to [M] or [S] (picture sizes indicated with ), and set the quality to
[A] or [›].
Raising the telescopic effect
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
When taking
pictures
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Rec])
1.4k: [ M]
2.0k: [ S]
1.4k: When recording 6K/4K photos
¢
([16:9]/[1:1])
1.5k: When recording 6K/4K photos
¢
([3:2])
1.6k: When recording 6K/4K photos
¢
([4:3])
¢ Only when [4K H 8M], [4K 8M] is set
When recording
motion pictures
[Ex. Tele Conv.]
([Motion Picture])
1.4k (motion pictures size is set to [4K] in [Rec
Quality])
2.7k (motion pictures size is set to [FHD] in [Rec
Quality])
151
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
∫ Increasing the zoom magnification in steps
• This can be used only when recording pictures.
1 Select the menu.
2 Set a function button to [Zoom Control]. (P60)
3 Press the function button.
4 Press 2/1 or 3/4.
• The zoom operation is terminated when the function button is pressed again or a certain
amount of time passes.
A Optical Zoom range (Focal length)
¢
B Extended Tele Conversion range for still picture
recording (Zoom magnification)
¢ This zoom slider is displayed when using an
interchangeable lens that supports the power zoom.
• A constant zoom speed will be set.
• The indicated zoom magnification is an approximation.
∫ Fixing the zoom magnification at the maximum level
> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ZOOM]
3/1: Tele (Enlarges distant subject)
4/2: Wide (Widens angle of view)
> [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [TELE CONV.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ON]
[OFF] [TELE CONV.]/[ON]
MENU
EX1.0x EX2.0x
4:3 4:3
MENU
MENU
4:3 4:3
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
152
Applicable modes:
Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further, you can zoom in
up to four times the original zoom magnification.
(Continuous zooming is not possible.)
• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, you can
display the Extended Tele Conversion setting screen for both pictures and motion pictures by
pressing the assigned function button. While this screen is displayed, you can change the
[Picture Size] setting by pressing [DISP.].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Quality] is set to [ ]
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [High Resolution Mode]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When [High Speed Video] is set to [180fps/FHD]
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
• In the following case, [ZOOM] does not work:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
[Digital Zoom]
> [Rec] > [Digital Zoom] > [4t]/[2t]
• When using the Digital Zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for taking
pictures.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [High Resolution Mode]
– When [High Speed Video] is set
– When using [Multi Exp.]
MENU
153
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Applicable modes:
Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is
compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).
• This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible with power zoom (electrically
operated zoom).
Changing the settings for a power zoom lens
> [Custom] > [Lens / Others] > [Power Zoom Lens]
[Disp Focal
Length]
When you zoom, the focal distance is
displayed and you can confirm the zoom
position.
A Focal distance indication
B Current focal distance
[Step Zoom]
When you operate the zoom with this setting
[ON], the zoom will stop at positions
corresponding to predetermined distances.
C Step zoom indication
• This setting does not work when recording
motion pictures or recording with [6K/4K
Pre-Burst].
[Zoom Speed]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not change.
[Photo]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Video]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Zoom Ring]
This may only be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens with a zoom
lever and zoom ring is attached.
When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled
to prevent accidental operation.
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
154
(Optical Zoom and Extended Tele Conversion for still picture recording are
operable)
• If you are using an interchangeable lens not supporting power zoom (H-ES12060/H-FS12060),
you can only operate Extended Tele Conversion for pictures by setting [Ex. Tele Conv.] to
[ZOOM].
1
Touch [ ] .
2
Touch [ ] .
• The slide bar is displayed.
3
Perform zoom operations by dragging
the slide bar.
• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched
position.
• To end touch zoom operations, touch [ ] again.
Zooming using touch operations (Touch zoom)
[ ]/[ ] Zooms slowly
[ ]/[ ] Zooms quickly
××
155
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Taking Pictures with the External Flash
(Optional)
Applicable modes:
You can attach a flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional) and take
pictures with it.
• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for how to attach the external flash.
∫ Removing the Hot Shoe Cover
The camera comes with a hot shoe cover attached to the hot shoe.
Remove the hot shoe cover by pulling it in the
direction indicated by arrow
2
while pressing it in
the direction indicated by arrow
1
.
• Keep the hot shoe cover out of reach of children to prevent
swallowing.
In the following cases, the flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
• When recording motion pictures
• When recording in Burst Mode (only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2
PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
• When recording 6K/4K photos
• When recording with the Post Focus function
• When using the electronic shutter
• When an image effect in [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
• When [High Resolution Mode] is set
• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
Using the flash skillfully
• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo
may turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be
obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
156
∫ Using a external flash by connecting with a flash synchro socket
• You can use an external flash by connecting a synchro cable
with a flash synchro socket. The socket has a lock screw to
prevent the cable falling off.
• Remove the flash synchro socket cap by turning in the direction
of the arrow.
• Be careful not to lose the flash synchro socket cap.
• The flash synchro socket has no polarity. You can use a synchro
cable regardless of its polarity.
• Use the flash with a synchronization voltage of 400 V or less.
• Do not use the synchro cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
When using other commercially available external flashes without
communication functions with the camera
• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash
in Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO
sensitivity to match the settings on the camera.
• Set to Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the
same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be
compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-Priority AE
Mode and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Program AE Mode
because the aperture value cannot be fixed.)
• Do not bring any objects near the flash. The heat and light from the flash may cause the
objects to deform or discolor.
• It may take time to charge the flash if you repeatedly take pictures. You must wait a moment to
take the next picture while the flash icon is blinking red indicating the flash is charging.
• You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even
when attaching the external flash.
• If you record at close range with a wide angle, light from the flash may be blocked by the lens,
darkening the lower part of the screen.
• Do not use commercially available external flashes with high-voltage synchro terminals,
reverse polarity or functions that enable them to communicate with the camera. Doing so may
cause the camera to malfunction or operate incorrectly.
• When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach
from the camera.
• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details.
157
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Setting the Flash Functions
• [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is available only when an external flash is attached.
Applicable modes:
Select whether to set the flash output automatically or manually.
• The firing mode cannot be set with the camera when using a flash (DMW-FL580L/
DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional). It can be set with the camera only with certain flash
models capable of allowing you to change the firing mode by operating the camera.
1 Select the menu.
2 (When [MANUAL] is selected)
Select the menu.
3 Press 2/1 to set the luminosity ratio and then press [MENU/SET].
Changing the firing mode
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Firing Mode]
[TTL] The camera automatically sets the flash output.
[MANUAL]
Set the luminosity ratio of the flash manually. In [TTL] you can shoot the
photograph you want even when shooting dark scenes that may
otherwise be too brightly lit by the flash.
• When [MANUAL] is set, the luminosity ratio ([1/1], etc.) is displayed on
the flash icon on the screen.
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Manual Flash Adjust.]
MENU
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
158
Applicable modes:
Set the flash to match the recording.
¢ It can be set only when [Wireless] in [Flash] is set to [OFF] and [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
• Some flash modes may not be available depending on the external flash’s settings.
The flash is activated twice.
The interval between the first and second flash is longer when [ ] or [ ] is
set. The subject should not move until the second flash is activated.
• The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from
the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.
Changing Flash Mode
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Mode]
‰
([Forced Flash
On])
([Forced On/
Red-Eye])
¢
The flash is activated every time regardless
of the recording conditions.
• Use this when your subject is back-lit
or under fluorescent light.
([Slow Sync.])
([Slow Sync./
Red-Eye])
¢
When taking pictures against a dark
background landscape, this feature will slow
the shutter speed when the flash is
activated. Dark background landscape will
appear brighter.
• Use this when you take pictures of
people in front of a dark background.
• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod
can enhance your photos.
Œ
([Forced Flash
Off])
The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.
• Use this when you take pictures in places where the use of
flash is not permitted.
MENU
159
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
∫ Available flash settings by Recording Mode
The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode.
(±: Available, —: Not available)
∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting
¢ This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure
Mode.
• In Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified
scene.
Applicable modes:
2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures
of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.
Recording Mode ‰ Œ
Program AE Mode
Aperture-Priority AE Mode
±±±±±
Shutter-Priority AE Mode
Manual Exposure Mode
±±——±
• In Intelligent Auto Mode ( or ), the flash will be set to [ ] or [Œ].
Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.)
‰
1/60th
¢
to 1/250th
1 to 1/250th
Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Synchro]
[1ST]
1st curtain synchro
The normal method when taking pictures with the flash.
[2ND]
2nd curtain synchro
The light source appears behind the subject and picture
becomes dynamic.
• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND].
• Only available when [Wireless] in [Flash] is set to [OFF].
• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [Flash Synchro] may deteriorate.
• You cannot set [ ] or [ ] when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND].
MENU
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
160
Applicable modes:
Adjust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed.
1 Select the menu.
2 Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can adjust from [j3 EV] to [i3 EV] in steps of 1/3 EV.
• Select [n0] to return to the original flash output.
Applicable modes:
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Adjust the flash output
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Adjust.]
•[i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted.
• It can be set only when [Wireless] in [Flash] is set to [OFF] and [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
Synchronizing the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Auto Exposure Comp.]
• For details on Exposure Compensation, refer to P107.
MENU
MENU
161
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
Taking Pictures with Wireless Flashes
Applicable modes:
Flashes compatible with this camera (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L:
optional) come with the wireless recording function.
With this function, you can separately control the firing of three flash groups and the flash
attached to the hot shoe of the camera.
1
Attach the flash (DMW-FL580L/DMW-FL360L/DMW-FL200L: optional)
to the camera.
2
Set the wireless flashes to RC Mode and then place them.
• Set a channel and groups for the wireless flash.
∫ Placing wireless flashes
Place the wireless flash with its wireless sensor facing toward the camera.
The following figure shows the estimated controllable range when you take pictures by
holding the camera horizontally. Controllable range differs depending on the surrounding
environment.
Placement range (when a flash
(DMW-FL360L: optional) is attached)
Placement example
• In this placement example, flash C is placed to erase the shadow of the subject that flashes A
and B will create.
• The recommended number of wireless flashes for each group is three or less.
• If the subject is too close, signal flashing may affect the exposure.
If you set [Communication Light] to [LOW] or lower the output with a diffuser or similar product,
the effect will be reduced.
5m
5m
7m
7m
(23 feet)
(23 feet)
(16 feet)
(16 feet)
50°50°
50°50°
30°30°
30°30°
A
B
C
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
162
3
Select the menu.
4
Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
• To fire a test flash, press [DISP.].
A Firing Mode
B Flash output
C Luminosity ratio
¢1 Not available when [Wireless FP] is set to [ON].
¢2 This option is not displayed when the flash (DMW-FL200L: optional) is attached to the
camera.
> [Rec] > [Flash]
[Wireless] Select [ON].
[Wireless Channel]
Select the channel you have set for the wireless flashes in
step
2.
[Wireless Setup] Proceed to step 4.
[External
Flash]
¢1
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.
[AUTO]
¢2
: Flash output is set by the external flash.
[MANUAL]: Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash manually.
[OFF]: The flash on the camera side emits only communication light.
[Flash Adjust.]
Set the flash output of the camera manually when [Firing Mode] is set to [TTL].
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
Set the luminosity ratio of the external flash when [Firing Mode] is set to
[MANUAL].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
[A Group]/
[B Group]/
[C Group]
[Firing Mode]
[TTL]: The camera automatically sets the output.
[AUTO]
¢1
: The wireless flashes automatically set the output.
[MANUAL]: Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes manually.
[OFF]: The wireless flashes of the specified group will not fire.
[Flash Adjust.]
Adjust the output of the wireless flashes manually when [Firing Mode] is set to
[TTL].
[Manual Flash Adjust.]
Set the luminosity ratio of the wireless flashes when [Firing Mode] is set to
[MANUAL].
• You can set from [1/1] (full brightness) to [1/128] in steps of 1/3.
MENU
163
6. Stabilizer, Zoom and Flash
During wireless recording, an external flash fires an FP flash (high speed repetition of flash
firing). This firing allows recording with the flash at a fast shutter speed.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]
Using other settings for wireless flash recording
Enabling FP firing for the wireless flashes
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Wireless FP]
Setting the output of communication light
> [Rec] > [Flash] > [Communication Light]
MENU
MENU
164
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture
Applicable modes:
This camera can record full high definition motion pictures compatible with the AVCHD
format or motion pictures recorded in MP4. In addition, the camera can record 4K motion
pictures in MP4.
Audio will be recorded in stereo.
1
Start recording by pressing the motion
picture button.
A Elapsed recording time
B Available recording time
• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode
is possible.
• The recording state indicator (red) C will flash while
recording motion pictures.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
• m: minute, s: second
2
Stop the recording by pressing the motion
picture button again.
1
m
37
37
s
1
m
37
s
3
s
3
s
3
s
165
7. Recording Motion Pictures
• When the ambient temperature is high or motion picture is recorded continuously, the camera
may display [ ] and stop the recording to protect itself. Wait until the camera cools down.
• In Creative Video Mode, motion pictures are recorded at the selected ISO sensitivity; in other
modes, they are recorded using [AUTO] (for motion pictures).
• You can display the available recording time before recording in Creative Video Mode.
• When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view
changes at the start of motion picture recording.
When [Rec Area] in the [Custom] ([Monitor / Display]) menu is set to [ ], angle of view
during motion picture recording is displayed.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated
during the recording of a motion picture.
• The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are
using, and the operational sound of the lens may be recorded.
• If the operation sound of the motion picture button pressed to end recording bothers you, try
the following:
– Record the motion picture about three seconds longer, and then divide the last part of the
motion picture using [Video Divide] in the [Playback] menu.
– Set the camera to Creative Video Mode, and use a shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1:
optional) to record motion pictures.
• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after
recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases.
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative
Control Mode)
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When taking pictures with [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
7. Recording Motion Pictures
166
1 Select the menu.
2 Press 3/4 to select [Rec Quality] and then press [MENU/SET].
When [AVCHD] is selected
¢1 AVCHD Progressive
When [MP4] is selected
¢2 These items are intended for motion picture editing on a computer. Playback and editing on
a device other than this camera require a high-performance PC environment.
Setting the format, size and frame rate
> [Motion Picture] > [Rec Format]
[AVCHD]
This data format is suitable for when playing back on a high-definition TV,
etc.
[MP4] This data format is suitable for when playing back on a PC, etc.
Item Size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate
[FHD/28M/60p]
¢1
1920k1080 60p 60 frames/second 28 Mbps
[FHD/17M/60i] 1920k1080 60i 60 frames/second 17 Mbps
[FHD/24M/30p] 1920k1080 60i 30 frames/second 24 Mbps
[FHD/24M/24p] 1920k1080 24p 24 frames/second 24 Mbps
Item Size Recording frame rate Sensor output Bit rate
[4K/150M/60p]
¢2
3840k2160 60p 60 frames/second 150 Mbps
[4K/100M/30p] 3840k2160 30p 30 frames/second 100 Mbps
[4K/100M/24p] 3840k2160 24p 24 frames/second 100 Mbps
[FHD/28M/60p] 1920k1080 60p 60 frames/second 28 Mbps
[FHD/20M/30p] 1920k1080 30p 30 frames/second 20 Mbps
MENU
167
7. Recording Motion Pictures
∫ About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures
Even if motion pictures suit their respective playback devices, their image or sound quality
may be poor or their recording information may not be displayed correctly when played
back, or they may not be able to be played back. If you experience such issues, play them
back on this camera.
• To play back motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/60p], [FHD/24M/30p] or [FHD/24M/24p]
in [AVCHD] with another device, or to transfer them to another device, you need a compatible
Blu-ray disc recorder or a PC on which the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is installed.
• For information about motion pictures recorded with their size set to [4K] in [Rec Quality], refer
to “Watching/Saving 4K Motion Pictures on an External Device” on
P293.
Applicable modes:
Focusing changes depending on the Focus Mode setting and the [Continuous AF] setting
in the [Motion Picture] menu.
• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC], if you press the shutter button halfway
while recording a motion picture, the camera will re-adjust the focus.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, operational sound may be recorded when
the Auto Focus is operated while recording a motion picture.
It is recommended to record with [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu set to [OFF], if
the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise.
• When operating the zoom while recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into focus.
• The higher the Bit rate value is, the higher the picture quality becomes. Since the camera
employs the VBR recording method, the bit rate is changed automatically depending on the
subject to record. As a result, the recording time is shortened when a fast-moving subject is
recorded.
• When [Miniature Effect] is selected for Creative Control Mode, you cannot select the items
used for 4K motion pictures.
• When recording motion pictures in 4K, use a card rated as UHS Speed Class 3.
• All motion pictures will be recorded in 4:2:0/8 bit Long GOP format.
How to set focus when recording a motion picture ([Continuous AF])
Focus mode [Continuous AF] Description of settings
[AFS]/[AFF]/
[AFC]
[ON]
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects
during recording.
[OFF]
The camera maintains the focus position at the start of
recording.
[MF] [ON]/[OFF] You can focus manually.
7. Recording Motion Pictures
168
Applicable modes:
You can record still pictures while recording a motion picture. (Simultaneous recording)
During motion picture recording, press the shutter
button fully to record a still picture.
• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed while recording
still pictures.
• Recording with the Touch Shutter function is also available.
∫ Setting the motion picture priority or still picture priority mode
Applicable modes:
Select the menu.
(P55)
Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures
> [Motion Picture] > [Picture Mode in Rec.]
[]
([Video Priority])
• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size determined by the [Rec Quality]
setting for motion pictures.
• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or
[].
(When set to [ ], still pictures will be recorded in [Quality] of [A].)
• Up to 80 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion
picture.
(Up to 20 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
[]
([Photo Priority])
• Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be
recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
• Up to 20 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion
picture.
(Up to 10 still pictures during 4K motion picture recording)
• The picture aspect ratio will be fixed to [16:9].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Rec Quality] is set to a motion picture item with a frame rate of [24p] (only when [ ]
([Photo Priority]) is set)
– When the drive mode is set to 6K/4K Photo (only when [ ] ([Photo Priority]) is set)
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Motion Picture] menu (only when [ ] ([Photo Priority])
is set)
13
13
13
MENU
169
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Applicable modes:
Display the microphone level on the recording screen.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• When [Mic Level Limiter] is set to [OFF], [Mic Level Disp.] is fixed to [ON].
Applicable modes:
Adjust the sound input level to 19 different levels (j12 dB to i6dB).
• Displayed dB values are approximate.
Applicable modes:
The camera adjusts the sound input level automatically, minimizing the sound distortion
(crackling noise) when the volume is too high.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Displaying/setting the sound input level
[Mic Level Disp.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Mic Level Disp.]
[Mic Level Adj.]
> [Motion Picture] > [Mic Level Adj.]
[Mic Level Limiter]
> [Motion Picture] > [Mic Level Limiter]
MENU
MENU
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
170
Applicable modes:
• You cannot delete recording dates after superimposing
them.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Recording images with superimposed recording dates ([Time Stamp
Rec])
> [Motion Picture] > [Time Stamp Rec]
• Recording dates are not recorded to 6K/4K burst files and RAW images.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When [High Speed Video] is set
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
10:00:00
DEC. 1.2018
MENU
171
7. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Pictures in Creative Video
Mode
Recording Mode:
It is possible to manually change the aperture, shutter speed and ISO sensitivity and
record motion pictures.
You can record motion picture with additional effects, such as the following:
1
Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Select the menu.
• The operation for changing the aperture value or shutter speed is the same as the
operation for setting the mode dial to , , or .
Recording slow motion pictures (High Speed Video)
P173
Recording Motion Pictures that Pan and Zoom While Maintaining a Fixed
Camera Position ([4K Live Cropping])
P174
> [Creative Video] > [Exposure Mode] > [P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
MENU
P
7. Recording Motion Pictures
172
3
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is
operated during the recording of a motion picture.
Using touch icons allows silent operation while recording motion pictures.
4
Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop
recording.
∫ Changing the [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings
Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO].
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch icon.
: Zoom
: Aperture value
: Shutter speed
: Exposure Compensation
: ISO sensitivity
: Mic level adjustment
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting
slowly
[ ]/[ ]: Changes the setting
quickly
• With Creative Video Mode, you can set an ISO sensitivity value that falls in the range below.
– Value range: [AUTO], [200] to [12800] ([100] to [12800] if [Extended ISO] is set)
– Upper limit of the [AUTO] ISO sensitivity: [6400] (When the [ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] in
[ISO Sensitivity (video)] is set to [AUTO])
> [Motion Picture] > [ISO Sensitivity (video)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting] [AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]
F
SS
ISO
MENU
173
7. Recording Motion Pictures
You can record slow motion pictures by performing ultra-high-speed recording.
• Use a UHS Speed Class 3 card.
(P30)
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Select the menu.
• The recording format is set to [MP4].
3 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) to start recording.
4 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button) again to stop recording.
Recording slow motion pictures (High Speed Video)
> [Creative Video] > [High Speed Video]
Settings
Frame rate (for
recording)
[Rec Quality] (for
storage)
Slow motion effect
[180fps/FHD] 180 frames/second FHD/20M/30p Approx. 1/6k
[60fps/4K] 60 frames/second 4K/100M/30p Approx. 1/2k
[48fps/4K] 48 frames/second 4K/100M/24p Approx. 1/2k
[OFF] —
• Auto Focus does not work.
• Audio is not recorded.
• When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you cannot set focus with Manual
Focus.
• Under fluorescent lighting, flicker or horizontal bars may be seen.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [4K Live Cropping] is set
MENU
7. Recording Motion Pictures
174
By cropping your motion picture down from the 4K angle of view to Full High Definition,
you can record a motion picture that pans and zooms in/out while leaving the camera in a
fixed position.
• [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] in the [Motion Picture] menu will be fixed to [MP4] and [FHD/
20M/30p], respectively.
• Hold the camera firmly in place while recording.
1 Set the mode dial to [ ].
2 Select the menu.
3 Set the cropping start frame.
A Cropping start frame
• When making settings for the first time, a cropping start
frame of size 1920k1080 is displayed. (After setting the
cropping start frame and end frame, the start frame and
end frame that you set immediately before will be
displayed.)
• The camera will remember the frame position and size
even when the camera is turned off.
Recording Motion Pictures that Pan and Zoom While Maintaining a
Fixed Camera Position ([4K Live Cropping])
Pan Zoom in
> [Creative Video] > [4K Live Cropping] > [40SEC]/[20SEC]
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the frame.
Pinching out/in
Enlarges/reduces the frame.
(The range of settings allowed is from
1920k1080 to 3840k2160.)
[DISP.] [Reset]
Returns the position of the frame to the center
and its size to the default setting.
[MENU/SET] [Set] Decides the position and size of the frame.
MENU
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
175
7. Recording Motion Pictures
4 Repeat step 3, and then set the cropping end frame.
B Cropping end frame
• The setting of the Auto Focus Mode switches to [š].
(Human eyes and bodies cannot be detected. In addition,
you cannot specify the person to be brought into focus.)
5 Press the motion picture button (or shutter button)
to start recording.
C Elapsed recording time
D Set operating time
• Immediately release the motion picture button (or the
shutter button) after pressing it.
• When the set operating time has elapsed, recording
automatically ends.
To end recording midway, press the motion picture button
(or the shutter button) again.
∫ Changing the position and size of a crop frame
Press 2 while the recording screen is displayed, and perform steps
3 and 4.
∫ To cancel [4K Live Cropping] recording
Set [OFF] in step
2.
• Brightness is measured and focus is done in the cropping start frame. During motion picture
recording, they are done in the crop frame. To lock the focus position, set [Continuous AF] to
[OFF], or set the Focus Mode to [MF].
• [Metering Mode] will be [ ] (Multiple).
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [High Speed Video] is set
ュリヴヱハ
5HVHW
6HW
7
s
7
s
7
s
20
s
20
s
20
s
176
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures
1
Press [(].
2
Press 2/1.
A Card slot
• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the
pictures in succession.
• Pictures can also be forwarded or rewound by rotating the control dial or dragging the
screen horizontally.
• You can forward or rewind pictures continuously by keeping your finger on the left or
right sides of the screen after forwarding/rewinding a picture.
• You can switch the card selected for playback by forwarding/rewinding pictures
continuously.
∫ To finish playback
Press [
(] again or press the shutter button halfway.
2: Play back the previous picture
1: Play back the next picture
Switching the card selected for playback instantly
You can switch the card selected for playback instantly by assigning [Slot Change] to a
function button.
Sending an image to a web service
If you press
4 when displaying images one by one, you can easily send an image to a
web service.
(P280)
Not available in these cases:
• This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system”
established by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association”
and with Exif “Exchangeable Image File Format”.
This camera can only display pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
177
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Motion Pictures
This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD and MP4 formats.
• Motion pictures are displayed with the motion picture icon
([ ]).
Press 3 to play back.
A Motion picture recording time
• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on
the screen.
For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as
[8m30s].
• Some information (recording information, etc.) is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in
[AVCHD].
• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you to play back motion pictures.
∫ Operations during Motion Picture Playback
¢1 The fast forward/rewind speed increases if you press 1/2 again.
¢2 When a motion picture recorded with [AVCHD] is rewound frame-by-frame, its frames will be
shown in intervals of approximately 0.5 seconds.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3 Play/Pause 4 Stop
2
Fast rewind
¢1
1
Fast forward
¢1
Frame-by-frame
rewind
(while pausing)
¢2
Frame-by-frame
forward
(while pausing)
Reduce volume level
Increase volume
level
• You can play back motion pictures on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
12s12s
12s
12s
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
178
1
Press 3 to pause motion picture playback.
• Press 2/1 to fine-adjust the pause position while the motion picture is paused.
2
Press [MENU/SET].
• The same operation can be performed by touching
[].
Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture
• Still pictures will be saved with [Aspect Ratio] set to [16:9] and [Quality] set to [A]. The
number of pixels will differ according to the motion picture you play back.
– When the motion picture size is set to [4K] in [Rec Quality]: [M] (8 M)
– When the motion picture size is set to [FHD] in [Rec Quality]: [S] (2 M)
• Still pictures created from a motion picture may be coarser than with normal picture quality.
• [ ] is displayed during playback of still pictures created from motion pictures.
179
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Switching the Playback Method
• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal view.
Using the Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear dial right.
1k 2k 4k 8k 16k
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
s Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.
s Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.
3/4/2/1 Dragging Moves the enlarged area (during enlarged display).
s
Forwards or rewinds the image while maintaining the same
zoom magnification and zoom position. (During Playback
Zoom)
2.0X2.0X
2.0X
2.0X
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
180
Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback)
Rotate the rear dial left.
1 screen 12 screens 30 screens Calendar screen
display
A Card slot
• Playback is performed separately by card slot. You can switch
the card selected for playback by pressing [Fn1]. (Except for
when the Calendar screen is displayed)
• If the rear dial is rotated to the right, the previous playback
screen will be displayed.
• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the
following icons.
– [ ]: 1 screen
– [ ]: 12 screens
– [ ]: 30 screens
– [ ]: Calendar screen display
• The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up or down.
• Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back.
∫ To return to Normal Playback
Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select a motion picture, it will be played back automatically.
Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback)
1 Rotate the rear dial left to display the Calendar screen.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the recording date and
press [MENU/SET].
• Only the images recorded on that date will be displayed.
• Rotate the rear dial left to return to the Calendar screen
display.
3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
• Playback is performed separately by card slot. You cannot switch the card selected for
playback while the Calendar is displayed.
• The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected
when the Calendar screen is first displayed.
• You can display the Calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.
• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as January 1st, 2018.
• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [World Time], the pictures are
displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback.
CAL
1/98
Fn1
8765432
1514131211109
22212019181716
29282726252423
1
SUN SATFRITHUWEDTUEMON
3130
2018
12
181
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Group Pictures
A picture group consists of multiple pictures. You can play back pictures in a group either
continuously or one by one.
• You can edit or delete all pictures in a group at once.
(For example, if you delete a picture group, all pictures in the group are deleted.)
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Burst Mode
with the burst speed [SH2], [SH1], [SH2 PRE] or [SH1 PRE].
A picture group saved at once with [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk
Saving].
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken with Focus
Bracket.
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in a Time Lapse
Shot.
[]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Stop
Motion Animation.
• Pictures will not be grouped if recorded without setting the clock.
1/981/981/981/98
SLF
SLF
SLF
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
182
∫ Continuously playing back Group Pictures
Press 3.
• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ],
[]).
• When playing back group pictures one at a time, options are displayed.
After selecting [Burst Play] (or [Sequential Play]), select either of the following playback
methods:
[From the first picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the first picture of the group.
[From the current picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the picture being played back.
• Operations during Group Pictures playback
∫ Playing back group pictures one by one
1 Press 4.
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ].
2 Press 2/1 to flip through images.
• To return to the normal playback screen, press 4 again or touch [ ].
• Each picture in a group can be treated same as normal pictures when they are played
back. (Such as Multi Playback, Playback Zoom and deleting images)
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3
Continuous
playback/Pause
4 Stop
2
Fast rewind
1
Fast forward
Rewind
(while pausing)
Forward
(while pausing)
1/981/98
1/98
1/98
SLF
SLF
SLF
183
8. Playing Back and Editing Images
Deleting Pictures
Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
∫ To delete a single picture
1 In Playback Mode, select the picture to delete and
then press [ ].
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].
2 Press 3 to select [Delete Single] and then press [MENU/SET].
∫ To delete multiple pictures (up to 100) or all the pictures
• Picture groups are treated as a single picture. (All the pictures in the selected picture group will
be deleted.)
• You can only delete images on one card at a time.
1 In Playback Mode, press [ ].
2 Press 3/4 to select [Delete Multi] or [Delete All] and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Delete All], all the pictures on the card of the displayed icon will be deleted.
• After selecting [Delete All], if you select [Delete All Non-rating], you can delete all pictures
except for those with ratings.
3 (When [Delete Multi] is selected)
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET] to set. (Repeat this step.)
•[‚] appears on the selected pictures.
To cancel the selection, press [MENU/SET] again.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can
switch the displayed card by pressing [Fn1].
4 (When [Delete Multi] is selected)
Press [DISP.] to execute.
• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.
ョㄏビ
ュリヴヱハ
Fn1
2.
184
9. Using Menu Functions
Menu list
You can change the settings registered to custom sets ( ).
(P86)
Menus that are only available for
particular Recording Modes
P184
A
The following menus are displayed only for their
corresponding Recording Modes:
– [Intelligent Auto]
– [Creative Video]
– [Custom Mode]
– [Creative Control]
[Rec]
P185
B
[Motion Picture]
P203
[Custom]
P206
[Setup]
P220
[My Menu]
P232
[Playback]
P233
Menus that are only available for particular Recording Modes
: [Intelligent Auto] menu
• [Intelligent Auto Mode] (P66)
• [iHandheld Night Shot] (P68)
• [iHDR] (P68)
: [Creative Video] menu
• [Exposure Mode]
(P171)
• [High Speed Video] (P173)
• [4K Live Cropping] (P174)
: [Custom Mode] menu
185
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback
method.
: [Creative Control] menu
• [Filter Effect] (P80) • [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] (P80)
:
[Rec] menu
• [Aspect Ratio] (P185)
•[Picture Size] (P186)
• [Quality] (P187)
• [AFS/AFF] (P89)
• [AF Custom Setting(Photo)] (P90)
• [Photo Style] (P188)
• [Filter Settings] (P190)
• [Color Space] (P191)
• [Metering Mode] (P192)
• [Highlight Shadow] (P192)
• [i.Dynamic] (P193)
• [i.Resolution] (P193)
• [Flash] (P158)
• [Red-Eye Removal] (P194)
• [ISO Sensitivity (photo)] (P194)
• [Min. Shtr Speed] (P194)
• [Long Shtr NR] (P195)
• [Shading Comp.] (P195)
• [Diffraction Compensation] (P196)
• [Stabilizer] (P145)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P150)
• [Digital Zoom] (P152)
• [Burst Shot 1 Setting] (P115)
• [Burst Shot 2 Setting] (P115)
• [6K/4K PHOTO] (P119)
• [Post Focus] (P130)
• [Self Timer] (P135)
• [High Resolution Mode] (P196)
• [Time Lapse/Animation] (P137, 138)
• [Silent Mode] (P198)
• [Shutter Type] (P199)
• [Shutter Delay] (P200)
• [Bracket] (P141)
• [HDR] (P201)
•[Multi Exp.] (P202)
• [Time Stamp Rec] (P170)
[Aspect Ratio]
> [Rec] > [Aspect Ratio]
[4:3] [Aspect Ratio] of a 4:3 TV
[3:2] [Aspect Ratio] of a 35 mm film camera
[16:9] [Aspect Ratio] of a 16:9 TV
[1:1] Square aspect ratio
• In the following case, [16:9], [1:1] does not work:
– When recording 6K/4K photos (only when [6K 18M] is set)
– When recording with the Post Focus function (only when [6K 18M] is set)
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
186
Applicable modes:
Set the number of pixels.
The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when
they are printed onto large sheets.
[Picture Size]
> [Rec] > [Picture Size]
When the aspect ratio is [4:3]. When the aspect ratio is [16:9].
Settings Image size Settings Image size
[L] (20M) 5184k3888 [L] (14.5M) 5184k2920
[M] (10M) 3712k2784 [M] (8M) 3840k2160
[S] (5M) 2624k1968 [S] (2M) 1920k1080
When the aspect ratio is [3:2]. When the aspect ratio is [1:1].
Settings Image size Settings Image size
[L] (17M) 5184k3456 [L] (14.5M) 3888k3888
[M] (9M) 3712k2480 [M] (7.5M) 2784k2784
[S] (4.5M) 2624k1752 [S] (3.5M) 1968k1968
• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] is set, [ ] is displayed on the picture sizes of each aspect ratio except
for [L].
• [Picture Size] cannot be set when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo, Post Focus
function or [High Resolution Mode].
MENU
187
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[Quality]
> [Rec] > [Quality]
Settings File format Description of settings
[A]
JPEG
A JPEG image in which image quality was given priority.
[›]
A standard image quality JPEG image.
This is useful for increasing the number of shots without
changing the number of pixels.
[]
RAWiJPEG
You can record a RAW image and a JPEG image ([A] or
[›]) simultaneously.
[]
[] RAW You can only record RAW images.
About RAW
RAW format refers to a data format of images that have not been processed. Playback
and editing of RAW images require the camera or the dedicated software.
• You can process RAW images in [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu.
• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to process and
edit RAW files on a PC.
• RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect ratio.
• When you delete an image recorded with [ ] or [ ], both the RAW and JPEG
images will be deleted simultaneously.
• When you play back an image recorded with [ ], gray areas corresponding to the aspect
ratio at the time of recording are displayed.
• The setting is fixed to [A] when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post Focus
function.
• This item is not available when [High Resolution Mode] is set.
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
188
Applicable modes:
You can select effects to match the type of image you wish to record.
[Photo Style]
> [Rec] > [Photo Style]
[Standard]
This is the standard setting.
[Vivid]
Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
[Natural]
Soft effect with low contrast.
[Monochrome]
Monochrome effect with no color shades.
[L.Monochrome]
Black-and-white effect with rich gradation and crisp black
accents.
[Scenery]
An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and
greens.
[Portrait]
An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful
skin tone.
[Custom1]
Use the setting registered in advance.
[Custom2]
[Custom3]
[Custom4]
[Cinelike D]
Gives priority to the dynamic range by using a gamma curve
designed to create film-like images. Suited for editing.
[Cinelike V]
Gives priority to the contrast by using a gamma curve designed
to create film-like images.
• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode:
– Only [Standard] or [Monochrome] can be set.
– The setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is switched to another Recording
Mode or this unit is turned off.
– Picture quality cannot be adjusted.
MENU
189
9. Using Menu Functions
∫ Adjusting the picture quality
1 Press 2/1 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1
to adjust.
¢1 [Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome] is selected. In
other cases, [Saturation] will be displayed.
¢2 Displayed only when [Monochrome] or [L.Monochrome] is selected.
• If you adjust the picture quality, [_] is displayed beside the Photo Style icon on the screen.
3 Press [MENU/SET].
∫ Registering settings to [Custom1] to [Custom4]
1 Adjust the picture quality following step 2 of “Adjusting the picture quality”,
and then press [DISP.].
2 Press 3/4 to select a destination to which the setting will be registered, and
press [MENU/SET].
[Contrast]
[r]
Increases the difference between the brightness and
the darkness in the picture.
[s]
Decreases the difference between the brightness
and the darkness in the picture.
[Sharpness]
[r] The picture is sharply defined.
[s] The picture is softly focused.
[Noise Reduction]
[r]
The noise reduction effect is enhanced.
Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly.
[s]
The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain
pictures with higher resolution.
[Saturation]
¢1
[r] The colors in the picture become vivid.
[s] The colors in the picture become natural.
[Color Tone]
¢1
[r] Adds a bluish tone.
[s] Adds a yellowish tone.
[Filter Effect]
¢2
[Yellow]
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect: Weak)
The blue sky can be recorded clearly.
[Orange]
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect:
Medium)
The blue sky can be recorded in darker blue.
[Red]
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect: Strong)
The blue sky can be recorded in much darker blue.
[Green]
The skin and lips of people appear in natural tones.
Green leaves appear brighter and more enhanced.
[Off] —
DISP.カスタム登録
-
5
-
500
+5+5
±0
±0
S
±0
±0
6WDQGDUG
S
9. Using Menu Functions
190
Applicable modes:
You can add the image effects (filters) of Creative Control Mode.
(P79)
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
∫ Change the settings by using the touch screen
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
[Filter Settings]
> [Rec] > [Filter Settings] > [Filter Effect]
[]:Image effect ON/OFF
[]:Selects an image effect (filter)
[]:Adjusts an image effect
• [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] are not
available in the following cases.
– Creative Video Mode
– When recording motion pictures
• The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [ISO 3200].
The ISO sensitivity for [High Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• When using [Filter Effect], you cannot use menus or recording functions not available in
Creative Control Mode.
For example, White Balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be set to [
Œ] (forced flash
off).
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, [Filter Settings] does not work:
– When [High Speed Video] is set
– When using [4K Live Cropping]
– When recording in
[High Resolution Mode]
MENU
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
EXPS
191
9. Using Menu Functions
∫ Taking a picture with and without an image effect simultaneously ([Simultaneous
Record w/o Filter])
You can press the shutter button once and take two pictures simultaneously, one with an
image effect and the other one without it.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Set this when you want to correct the color reproduction of the recorded pictures on a PC,
printer etc.
> [Rec] > [Filter Settings] > [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter]
• A picture with an image effect will be taken first, followed by a picture without it.
• Only an image with an image effect is displayed for Auto Review.
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, [Simultaneous Record w/o Filter] does not work:
– Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture (only when set to [ ] ([Video
Priority]))
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
[Color Space]
> [Rec] > [Color Space]
[sRGB]
Color space is set to sRGB color space.
This is widely used in computer related equipment.
[AdobeRGB]
Color space is set to AdobeRGB color space.
AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional
printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB.
• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] in the following cases.
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
192
Applicable modes:
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
Applicable modes:
You can adjust the brightness of bright and dark portions on an image while checking the
brightness on the screen.
1 Rotate the front/rear dial to adjust the brightness of
bright/dark portions.
A Bright portion
B Dark portion
• Adjustments can also be made by dragging the graph.
• To register a preferred setting, press 3, and select the
destination where the custom setting will be registered to
([Custom1] ( )/[Custom2] ( )/[Custom3] ( )).
2 Press [MENU/SET].
[Metering Mode]
> [Rec] > [Metering Mode]
[]
(Multiple)
This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable
exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen
automatically.
Usually, we recommend using this method.
[]
(Center weighted)
This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center of the
screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
[]
(Spot)
This is the method to measure the subject in the spot
metering target A.
• If you set the spot metering target on the edge of the
screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness
around the location.
[Highlight Shadow]
> [Rec] > [Highlight Shadow]
(Standard) A state with no adjustments is set.
(Raise the contrast) Bright areas are brightened, and dark areas are darkened.
(Lower the contrast) Bright areas are darkened, and dark areas are brightened.
(Brighten dark areas) Dark areas are brightened.
// (Custom) Registered custom settings can be applied.
MENU
MENU
ヒ
ヤ
ビ
ヤ
ピ
ヤ
ヒ
ヤ
ビ
ヤ
ピ
ヤ
193
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between the
background and subject is great, etc.
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by using the Intelligent Resolution
Technology.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• The screen display can be switched by pressing [DISP.] on the brightness adjustment screen.
• Turning off this unit will return the setting adjusted with / / / back to the default
setting.
[i.Dynamic]
> [Rec] > [i.Dynamic]
Not available in these cases:
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• [i.Dynamic] does not work when [HDR] is set.
[i.Resolution]
> [Rec] > [i.Resolution]
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
194
Applicable modes:
If you fire the flash when using Red-Eye Reduction ([ ] or [ ]), the camera
automatically detects red-eye and corrects the picture.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
Set the upper and lower limits of the ISO sensitivity when it is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
Applicable modes:
Set the minimum shutter speed when the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
Settings: [AUTO]/[1/32000] to [1/1]
[Red-Eye Removal]
> [Rec] > [Red-Eye Removal]
• [ ] is displayed on the icon when it is set to [ON].
• Under certain circumstances, red-eye cannot be corrected.
[ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
> [Rec] > [ISO Sensitivity (photo)]
[ISO Auto Lower Limit Setting] [200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]
[ISO Auto Upper Limit Setting]
[AUTO]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]/
[25600]
[Min. Shtr Speed]
> [Rec] > [Min. Shtr Speed]
• The shutter speed may become slower than the set value in situations where proper exposure
cannot be obtained.
MENU
MENU
MENU
195
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes
slower to take pictures of night or similar scenery.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can record
pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
[Long Shtr NR]
> [Rec] > [Long Shtr NR]
• [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the same time as the shutter speed for
signal processing.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording in Burst Mode (only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2
PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When using the electronic shutter
[Shading Comp.]
> [Rec] > [Shading Comp.]
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
Not available in these cases:
• Correction is not possible in the following cases:
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.]
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When [High Speed Video] is set
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
196
Applicable modes:
The camera raises the resolution by correcting the blurriness caused by diffraction when
the aperture is closed.
Settings: [AUTO]/[OFF]
Applicable modes:
This function generates a picture with enhanced resolution from pre-recorded images. It is
effective for still subjects.
• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.
• If you are using a Panasonic interchangeable lens, its image stabilizer function will be
automatically set to [OFF].
When using a non-Panasonic interchangeable lens provided with an image stabilizer function
that can be turned ON/OFF, set it to OFF.
1 Press 3/4 to select [Start], and press [MENU/SET].
• The High-Res Mode icon A will flash when shake is
detected.
It may not be possible to create pictures with the
impression of high resolution. To avoid this, hold the
camera firmly.
2 Decide on the composition, and perform recording.
• The screen will go dark during recording.
• The recording state indicator (red) B will flash.
Do not move the camera while the indicator is flashing.
• Recording will finish automatically.
When the recording has finished, the camera will combine
the pictures, so it will not be able to perform the next
recording for a while.
• You can proceed to the next recording.
3 Press [Fn2] to end High-Res Mode.
[Diffraction Compensation]
> [Rec] > [Diffraction Compensation]
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the recording conditions.
• Noise may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.
[High Resolution Mode]
> [Rec] > [High Resolution Mode]
MENU
MENU
197
9. Using Menu Functions
∫ Changing the setup
[Picture Size]
Sets the picture size.
When the aspect ratio is [4:3]. When the aspect ratio is [16:9].
[XL] (80.5M):
[LL] (40M):
10368k7776
7296k5472
[XL] (60.5M):
[LL] (30M):
10368k5832
7296k4104
When the aspect ratio is [3:2]. When the aspect ratio is [1:1].
[XL] (71.5M):
[LL] (35.5M):
10368k6912
7296k4864
[XL] (60.5M):
[LL] (30M):
7776k7776
5472k5472
• RAW images are always recorded in the [4:3] (10368k7776) aspect ratio.
[Quality]
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
[A] (JPEG images with priority given to picture quality)/[ ] (simultaneous
recording of RAWiJPEG images)/[ ] (RAW images)
[Simul
Record
Normal Shot]
Saves the first picture of pictures taken before the combining process in
addition to a combined picture if [ON] is selected. Pictures will be saved with
[Picture Size] set to [L].
[ON]/[OFF]
[Shutter
Delay]
Sets the delay between the time the shutter button is pressed to the time the
shutter is released.
[30 SEC]/[15 SEC]/[8 SEC]/[4 SEC]/[2 SEC]/[1 SEC]/[1/2 SEC]/
[1/4 SEC]/[1/8 SEC]/[OFF]
• We recommend selecting a setting other than [OFF] when not using a shutter
remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional) to prevent motion blur caused by
pressing the shutter button.
9. Using Menu Functions
198
Applicable modes:
Disables operational sounds and output of light at once.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.
The following settings are fixed.
– [Flash Mode]: [Œ] (forced flash off)
– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]
– [Beep Volume]: [s] (OFF)
– [E-Shutter Vol]: [ ] (OFF)
• Auto Review only displays combined pictures.
• The available setting ranges of the following functions during [High Resolution Mode]
recording will differ from those during normal picture recording.
– Minimum aperture value: F8
– Shutter speed: 1 to 1/32000th
– ISO sensitivity: Up to [ISO 1600]
– Focus mode: Fixed to [AFS] or [MF]
• [Shutter Type] is fixed to [ESHTR].
• When subjects are recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent/LED lighting,
the color tone or brightness of the image may change, or horizontal stripes may appear on the
screen.
Lowering the shutter speed may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
• Other devices may not be able to play back images recorded in [High Resolution Mode].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When taking pictures with [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
– When recording in [Multi Exp.]
– When an image effect in [Filter Effect] of [Filter Settings] is set
[Silent Mode]
> [Rec] > [Silent Mode]
• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light up/flash.
– Charging lamp/WIRELESS connection lamp
– Self-timer indicator
• Sounds that are produced by the camera regardless of your operations, such as the lens
aperture sound, cannot be muted.
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
MENU
199
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Select the shutter to be used for taking pictures.
¢1 This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode.
¢2 Up to an ISO sensitivity of [ISO3200]. When the setting is higher than [ISO3200], the shutter
speed will be faster than 1 second.
¢3 Electronic shutter sound settings can be changed in [E-Shutter Vol] and [E-Shutter Tone].
• Compared to Mechanical Shutter Mode, Electronic Front Curtain Mode produces less
shutter-induced shake, so it can minimize the influence of shutter vibration.
• Electronic Shutter Mode allows you to take pictures without causing shutter vibration.
[Shutter Type]
> [Rec] > [Shutter Type]
[AUTO]
Switches the shutter type automatically depending on the recording condition
and shutter speed.
[MSHTR] Takes pictures in Mechanical Shutter Mode.
[EFC] Takes pictures in Electronic Front Curtain Mode.
[ESHTR] Takes pictures in Electronic Shutter Mode.
Mechanical shutter
Electronic Front
Curtain
Electronic Shutter
Description
The camera starts and
ends an exposure with
the mechanical shutter.
The camera starts an
exposure electronically,
and ends it with the
mechanical shutter.
The camera starts and
ends an exposure
electronically.
Flash ±±—
Shutter Speed
(Sec.)
B (Bulb)
¢1
/60 to 1/8000th B (Bulb)
¢1
/60 to 1/2000th 1
¢ 2
to 1/32000th
Shutter sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Mechanical shutter
sound
Electronic shutter
sound
¢ 3
• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.
• When a moving subject is recorded with the electronic shutter, the subject may appear
distorted on the picture.
• When the electronic shutter is used under fluorescent or LED lighting, etc., horizontal
stripes may appear on the picture. In such cases, lowering the shutter speed may
reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
200
Applicable modes:
To reduce the influence of hand shake or shutter vibration, shutter is released after the
specified time has passed.
Settings: [8SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
[Shutter Delay]
> [Rec] > [Shutter Delay]
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording in Burst Mode (only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2
PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
MENU
201
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich
gradation.
You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,
the contrast between the background and the subject is large.
An image combined by HDR is recorded in JPEG.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[SET]
∫ Changing settings
[HDR]
> [Rec] > [HDR]
[Dynamic Range]
[AUTO]: Automatically adjusts the exposure range according to the
differences between the bright and dark areas.
[n1EV]/[n2EV]/[n3EV]:
Adjusts the exposure within the selected exposure
parameters.
[Auto Align]
[ON]: Automatically corrects camera shake (jitter) and other
problems that can cause the images to misalign.
Recommended for use during hand-held shooting.
[OFF]: Image misalignment not adjusted.
Recommended when a tripod is used.
• Do not move the unit during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
• The angle of view becomes narrow slightly when [Auto Align] is set to [ON].
• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
Not available in these cases:
• [HDR] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording with the Bracket function
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
202
Applicable modes:
Gives an effect like multi exposure. (up to 4 times equivalent per a single image)
1 Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Decide on the composition, and take the first
picture.
• After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway
down to take the next picture.
• Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET]
for one of the following operations.
3 Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures.
• To save the recorded pictures and finish Multiple Exposure, press [Fn2] when taking
pictures.
4 Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to finish.
∫ Changing settings
[Multi Exp.]
> [Rec] > [Multi Exp.]
– [Next]: Advance to the next picture.
– [Retake]: Return to the first picture.
– [Exit]: Record the image of the first picture, and
finish the multiple exposure picture-taking
session.
[Auto Gain]
If you select [OFF], all exposure results are superimposed as they are.
Compensate the exposure as necessary, depending on the subject.
[Overlay]
If you select [ON], you can apply Multi Exposure to previously recorded
images. After [Start] is selected, images on the card will be displayed.
Select a RAW image, and press [MENU/SET] to proceed to recording.
• The recording information displayed for pictures taken with multiple exposures is the
recording information for the last picture taken.
• Items shown in gray on the menu screen cannot be set during multiple exposures.
• You can perform [Overlay] only for RAW images recorded with the camera (excluding those
recorded in [High Resolution Mode]).
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
– When recording in [High Resolution Mode]
MENU
([LW
5HWDNH
1H[W
([LW
5HWDNH
203
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
Select the luminance range to match the use of video.
• [Luminance Level] can be set only when [MP4] has been selected as the [Rec Format] setting.
Settings: [0-255]/[16-255]
• This function works only for motion pictures. Still pictures (including those you take during
motion picture recording) will be taken with [0-255].
Applicable modes:
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.
Settings: [1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/[OFF]
:
[Motion Picture] menu
• [Rec Format]
(P166)
• [Rec Quality] (P166)
• [AFS/AFF] (P89)
• [Continuous AF] (P167)
• [Photo Style] (P188)
• [Filter Settings] (P190)
• [Luminance Level] (P203)
• [Metering Mode] (P192)
• [Highlight Shadow] (P192)
• [i.Dynamic] (P193)
• [i.Resolution] (P193)
• [ISO Sensitivity (video)] (P172)
• [Shading Comp.] (P195)
• [Diffraction Compensation] (P196)
• [Stabilizer] (P145)
• [Flkr Decrease] (P203)
• [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P150)
• [Digital Zoom] (P152)
• [Picture Mode in Rec.] (P168)
• [Time Stamp Rec] (P170)
• [Mic Level Disp.] (P169)
• [Mic Level Adj.] (P169)
• [Mic Level Limiter] (P169)
• [Wind Noise Canceller] (P204)/
[Wind Cut]
(P312)
• [Lens Noise Cut] (P204)
• [Special Mic.] (P311)
• [Sound Output] (P205)
[Luminance Level]
> [Motion Picture] > [Luminance Level]
[Flkr Decrease]
> [Motion Picture] > [Flkr Decrease]
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
204
Applicable modes:
This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphone while maintaining
sound quality.
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[OFF]
• [HIGH] effectively reduces the wind noise by minimizing the low-pitched sound when a strong
wind is detected.
• [STANDARD] extracts and reduces only the wind noise without deteriorating the sound quality.
• You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.
• This function works only with the built-in microphone.
When an external microphone is connected, [Wind Cut] is displayed.
Applicable modes:
You can reduce the zoom sound of an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom
that is produced during motion picture recording.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• This function works only when an interchangeable lens that supports power zoom is used.
• When this function is used, the sound quality may differ from that during normal operation.
[Wind Noise Canceller]
> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Noise Canceller]
[Lens Noise Cut]
> [Motion Picture] > [Lens Noise Cut]
MENU
MENU
205
9. Using Menu Functions
Applicable modes:
You can record motion pictures while hearing the sounds that are being recorded by
connecting a commercially available headphones to this unit.
A Headphone socket
B Commercially available headphone
• Do not use the headphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
• When headphones are connected, electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
∫ Switch the sound output method
• If you use the HDMI output during recording, the setting is fixed to [REC SOUND].
∫ Adjusting the headphone volume
1 Select the menu.
2 Connect headphones, and rotate the control dial while the recording screen is
displayed or a motion picture is being played back.
• You can also adjust the volume by touching [ ] or [ ] during playback.
To adjust the volume using the menu:
[Sound Output]
> [Motion Picture] > [Sound Output]
[REALTIME]
Actual sound without time lag.
It may be different to the audio recorded in the motion picture.
[REC SOUND]
Sound that is being recorded in motion pictures.
The audio may be output slower than the actual audio.
>
[Custom] > [Operation] > [Dial Set.] > [Control Dial
Assignment] > [ ]
: Reduce volume level : Increase volume level
> [Setup] > [Headphone Volume]
MENU
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
206
:
[Custom] menu
[Exposure]
• [ISO Increments]
(P207)
• [Extended ISO] (P207)
• [Exposure Comp. Reset] (P207)
[Focus / Release Shutter]
• [AF/AE Lock] (P106)
• [AF/AE Lock Hold] (P207)
• [Shutter AF] (P207)
• [Half Press Release] (P207)
• [Quick AF] (P208)
• [Eye Sensor AF] (P208)
• [Pinpoint AF Setting] (P208)
• [AF-Point Scope Setting] (P94)
• [AF Assist Lamp] (P208)
• [Focus/Release Priority] (P209)
• [Focus Switching for Vert / Hor] (P97)
• [Loop Movement Focus Frame] (P209)
• [AF Area Display] (P209)
•[AF+MF] (P210)
• [MF Assist] (P210)
• [MF Assist Display] (P210)
[Operation]
• [Fn Button Set]
(P60)
• [Fn Lever Setting] (P60)
• [Q.MENU] (P211)
• [Dial Set.] (P46)
• [Joystick Setting] (P48)
• [Operation Lock Setting] (P211)
• [Video Button] (P211)
• [Touch Settings] (P211)
[Monitor / Display]
• [Auto Review]
(P212)
• [Monochrome Live View] (P212)
• [Constant Preview] (P212)
• [Peaking] (P213)
• [Histogram] (P213)
• [Guide Line] (P213)
• [Center Marker] (P214)
• [Highlight] (P214)
• [Zebra Pattern] (P214)
• [Expo.Meter] (P215)
• [MF Guide] (P215)
• [LVF/Monitor Disp. Set] (P49)
• [Monitor Info. Disp.] (P215)
• [Rec Area] (P215)
• [Remaining Disp.] (P215)
• [Menu Guide] (P215)
[Lens / Others]
• [Lens Position Resume]
(P216)
• [Power Zoom Lens] (P153)
• [Lens Fn Button Setting] (P216)
• [Face Recog.] (P217)
• [Profile Setup] (P219)
207
9. Using Menu Functions
You can adjust the ISO sensitivity settings for every 1/3 EV.
Settings: [1/3 EV]/[1 EV]
ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum [ISO100].
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is changed or the camera is
turned off.
When [ON] is selected, focus and exposure stays locked even if you press and release
[AF/AE LOCK].
To clear the lock, press [AF/AE LOCK] again.
Set whether or not the focus is adjusted automatically when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
> [Custom] > [Exposure]
[ISO Increments]
[Extended ISO]
[Exposure Comp. Reset]
> [Custom] > [Focus / Release Shutter]
[AF/AE Lock Hold]
[Shutter AF]
[Half Press Release]
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
208
As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and
focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed.
The camera automatically adjusts the focus when the eye sensor is active.
AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed half-way
making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions.
[Quick AF]
• The battery will be consumed faster than usual.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Preview Mode
– In low light situations
[Eye Sensor AF]
• [Eye Sensor AF] may not work in dimly lit conditions.
[Pinpoint AF Setting]
[Pinpoint AF Time]
Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Pinpoint AF Display]
Sets whether to display the assist screen in a window or full screen.
[AF Assist Lamp]
• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.5 m (11 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12060) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
• Remove the lens hood.
• The AF Assist Lamp gets slightly blocked when the interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/
H-FS12060) is used, but it does not affect the performance.
• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus when a lens
with large diameter is used.
• The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases.
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
209
9. Using Menu Functions
Set whether to give priority to focus or shutter release during Auto Focus.
• Different settings can be applied to different Focus Mode settings ([AFS/AFF], [AFC]).
When setting the AF area position or the MF Assist display position, you can now loop the
position from one edge to the other edge of the screen.
This changes the AF area display setting to be applied when the Auto Focus Mode is set
to [ ] ([225-Area]) or [ ], etc. ([Custom Multi]).
[Focus/Release Priority]
[FOCUS] Disables recording when focus is not achieved.
[BALANCE]
Performs recording while controlling the balance between focusing and
shutter release timing.
[RELEASE] Enables recording even when focus is not achieved.
[Loop Movement Focus Frame]
[AF Area Display]
[ON]
Displays AF areas on the recording screen.
• AF areas are not displayed when [ ] (225-Area) or [ ], [ ] or [ ]
in [Custom Multi] is set to the default AF area setting.
[OFF]
Displays AF areas on the recording screen for just a few seconds after you
start using them.
• Even when [ON] is set, the same operation as [OFF] is performed in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– Creative Video Mode
ヤヒ
ヤビ
ヤピ
9. Using Menu Functions
210
When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to [AFS] or
set AF Lock using [AF/AE LOCK]), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.
Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen).
• Available settings vary depending on the lens used.
When an interchangeable lens having a focus ring (H-ES12060/H-FS12060) is used
When an interchangeable lens with no focus ring is used
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a windowed screen display or in a
full screen display.
[AF+MF]
[MF Assist]
[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens or by pressing [ ].
[]The screen is enlarged by operating the lens.
[] The screen is enlarged by pressing [ ].
[OFF] The screen is not be enlarged.
• MF Assist is not displayed in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– When using the Digital Zoom
[MF Assist Display]
211
9. Using Menu Functions
If you select [CUSTOM], you can customize the Quick Menu settings. (P59)
Sets the control functions to be disabled with the function button [Operation Lock].
Enables/disables the motion picture button.
Enables/disables the Touch operation.
> [Custom] > [Operation]
[Q.MENU]
[Operation Lock Setting]
[Cursor]
Disables the functions of the cursor buttons, the [MENU/SET] button, and
the control dial.
[Joystick] Disables the functions of the joystick.
[Touch Screen] Disables the touch functions of the touch panel.
[Video Button]
[Touch Settings]
[Touch Screen] All touch operations.
[Touch Tab]
Operations of tabs, such as [ ] on the right side of the screen.
[Touch AF]
Operation to bring the subject you touch into focus ([AF]) or adjust the
focus and brightness ([AF+AE]).
(P101)
[Touch Pad AF]
Operation to move the AF area by touching the monitor when the
viewfinder is in use.
(P101)
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
212
Displays a picture immediately after it is taken.
• [Duration Time (6K/4K PHOTO)] works only for 6K/4K photo recording, while [Duration Time
(Post Focus)] works only for Post Focus recording.
• If you set [Playback Operation Priority] to [ON], you can perform certain playback operations
during Auto Review. For example, you can switch between different types of playback screens
or delete pictures.
• If you select [HOLD], the picture taken stays displayed until the shutter button is pressed
halfway. [Playback Operation Priority] will be fixed to [ON].
You can display the recording screen in black and white.
You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and shutter speed on the recording
screen in Manual Exposure Mode.
> [Custom] > [Monitor / Display]
[Auto Review]
[Monochrome Live View]
• Even if you use the HDMI output during recording, this function will not work for the connected
device.
• Recorded images will not be affected.
Not available in these cases:
• [Monochrome Live View] is not available when [Night Mode] is used.
[Constant Preview]
• This function does not work when using the flash.
MENU
213
9. Using Menu Functions
In-focus portions (portions on the screen with clear outlines) are highlighted when focus is
being adjusted manually.
• When [Detect Level] in [SET] is set to [HIGH], portions to be highlighted are reduced, allowing
you to achieve a more precise focus.
• Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the [Display Color] setting as follows.
Display the histogram.
You can set the position by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.
• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black
to white) and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.
A dark
B bright
This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.
When [ ] is set, guideline positions can be set by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline of the recording screen.
[Peaking]
[Detect Level] [HIGH] [LOW]
[Display Color]
[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)
[ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)
[ ] (Yellow-green) [ ] (Green)
[ ] (Pink) [ ] (Red)
[ ] (White) [ ] (Gray)
• Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ON] ([Detect Level]:
[LOW]) > [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) > [OFF].
• [Peaking] does not work with [Rough Monochrome] in Creative Control Mode.
[Histogram]
• When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.
– During Exposure Compensation
– When the flash is activated
– When the correct exposure is not achieved, such as when the lighting is low.
• The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode.
[Guide Line]
9. Using Menu Functions
214
The center of the recording screen will be displayed as [+].
When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back,
white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.
Indicates parts that may become white saturated through overexposure in a zebra pattern.
Select [SET] to set the brightness to be processed as a zebra pattern.
• You can select a brightness value between [50%] and [105%]. In [Zebra 2], you can select
[OFF]. If you select [100%] or [105%], only the areas that are already white saturated are
displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller the value is, the wider the brightness range to be
processed as a zebra pattern will be.
[Center Marker]
[Highlight]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative referring to the histogram and then taking the picture again. It may result in a better
quality picture.
• This function is disabled during 6K/4K photo playback, playback of images recorded with the
Post Focus function, Multi Playback, Calendar Playback, or Playback Zoom.
[Zebra Pattern]
[ZEBRA1] [ZEBRA2]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative referring to the histogram and then taking the picture.
• Displayed zebra patterns will not be recorded.
• If you assign [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] in the [Custom] ([Operation]) menu, each time
you press the function button to which the setting is assigned, the zebra pattern toggles as
follows:
[Zebra 1]
> [Zebra 2] > [OFF].
When [Zebra 2] is set to [OFF], the setting toggles in the order of [Zebra 1]
> [OFF], allowing
you to switch the setting quickly.
215
9. Using Menu Functions
Display the exposure meter.
When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows
you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.
A Indicator for ¶ (infinity)
Display the recording information screen.
(P50, 316)
This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording and still picture recording.
This will switch display between the number of recordable pictures and available recording
time.
Display a selection screen when you set the mode dial to [ ].
[Expo.Meter]
• Set to [ON] to display the Exposure meter when performing
Program Shift, setting aperture, and setting shutter speed.
• Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
• When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display
information for screen by pressing [DISP.].
• If no operations are performed for approximately 4 seconds, the Exposure meter disappears.
[MF Guide]
[Monitor Info. Disp.]
[Rec Area]
Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for still picture
recording.
Displays the recording area according to the angle of view for motion picture
recording.
• The recording area indicated is an approximation.
Not available in these cases:
• When recording with the 6K/4K Photo function or Post Focus function, [Rec Area] is fixed to
[].
[Remaining Disp.]
[Menu Guide]
2
00
0
60
60
4.0
4.0
98
98
98
SS
SS
SS
F
F
250 125 60 30 15
4.02.8 5.6 8.0
9. Using Menu Functions
216
Saves the focus position when you turn off the camera. When an interchangeable lens that
is compatible with power zoom is in use, the zoom position is also saved.
Sets the function to be assigned to the focus button of an interchangeable lens.
• You can call up the assigned function by setting the focus selector switch of a compatible
interchangeable lens to [Fn] and then pressing the focus button of the lens.
> [Custom] > [Lens / Others]
[Lens Position Resume]
[Lens Fn Button Setting]
Settings: [Focus Stop]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF-ON]/[AF-Point Scope]/[Stabilizer]/
[Focus Area Set]/[AF Mode/MF]/[Preview]/[Off]/[Restore to Default]
• When [Focus Stop] is used, the focus is locked while the focus button is pressed and held.
MENU
217
9. Using Menu Functions
Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and
priorities focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the back
or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.
[Face Recog.]
[ON] Enables the Face Recognition function.
[OFF] Disables the Face Recognition function.
[MEMORY]
Allows you to register face images, or edit or delete registered information.
Face Settings
You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to
6 people.
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the Face Recognition
frame that is not registered, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide.
• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.)
cannot be registered.
• To display the description of the face registration,
press 1 or touch [ ].
3 Set the item.
• You can register up to 3 face images.
[Name]
It is possible to register names.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
[Age] It is possible to register the birthday.
[Add
Images]
(Add
Images)
To add additional face images.
• Select a blank face image frame to register a new
image.
(Delete)
To delete one of the face images.
• Select the face image you want to delete.
Change or delete the information for a registered person
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the face image to edit or delete and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Set the item.
[Info Edit]
Changing the information of an already registered person.
• Perform step 3 in “Face Settings”.
[Priority]
The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for
higher-priority faces.
• Rearrange and set the face priority.
[Delete] Deleting information of a registered person.
KEN
1HZ
9. Using Menu Functions
218
• The following functions will also work with the Face Recognition function.
In Recording Mode
– Display of corresponding name when camera detects a registered face
¢
In Playback Mode
– Display of name and age
¢ Names of up to 3 people are displayed.
Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the
order of registration.
Point of recording when registering the face images
• Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making
sure the outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows
are not covered with hair when registering.
• Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when
registering.
(Flash will not flash during registration.)
(Good example for registering)
When face is not recognized during recording
• Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or
angles.
• Additionally register at the location of recording.
• When a person who is registered is not recognized, correct by re-registering.
• Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognize faces correctly even for
registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment.
• [Face Recog.] only works when the AF Mode is set to [š].
– It works only when a face has been detected.
– When you specify the person to be brought into focus, [Face Recog.] is not work.
• During the Burst Mode, [Face Recog.] picture information can be attached to only the first
picture.
• When group pictures are played back, the name of the first picture of the set is displayed.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
219
9. Using Menu Functions
If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name
and age in months and years in the images.
You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using [Text Stamp].
Settings: [ ] ([Baby1])/[ ] ([Baby2])/[ ] ([Pet])/[OFF]/[SET]
∫ Setting [Age] or [Name]
1 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4 to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4 to select [Age] or [Name] and then press
[MENU/SET].
4 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/
SET].
[Profile Setup]
Enter [Age] (birthday).
Enter [Name].
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• You can print out ages and names with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
Not available in these cases:
• [Profile Setup] is not available when recording is performed with the 6K/4K Photo or Post
Focus function.
• Ages and names are not recorded in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– Still pictures recorded during motion picture recording ([ ] ([Video Priority]))
9. Using Menu Functions
220
Settings: [URL display]/[QR Code display]
Sets the times for the region where you live and your holiday destination.
• [Destination] can be set after setting up [Home].
After selecting [Destination] or [Home], press 2/1 to select an area, and press
[MENU/SET] to set.
“ [Destination]:
Travel destination area
A Current time of the destination area
B Time difference from home area
– [Home]:
Your home area
C Current time
D Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
:
[Setup] menu
• [Online Manual] (P220)
• [Cust.Set Mem.] (P85)
• [Clock Set] (P38)
•[World Time] (P220)
• [Travel Date] (P221)
•[Wi-Fi] (P222)
• [Bluetooth] (P222)
• [Wireless Connection Lamp] (P222)
• [Beep] (P222)
• [Headphone Volume] (P205)
• [Economy] (P223)
• [Monitor Display Speed] (P224)
• [LVF Display Speed] (P224)
• [Night Mode] (P224)
• [Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder] (P225)
• [Monitor Luminance] (P225)
• [Status-LCD Backlight] (P225)
• [Eye Sensor] (P226)
• [Battery Use Priority] (P309)
• [USB Mode] (P226)
• [USB Power Supply] (P226)
• [TV Connection] (P227)
• [Language] (P227)
• [Version Disp.] (P227)
• [Folder / File Settings] (P228)
• [Double Slot Function] (P229)
• [Save/Restore Camera Setting] (P230)
• [No.Reset] (P230)
•[Reset] (P231)
• [Reset Network Settings] (P231)
• [Pixel Refresh] (P231)
• [Sensor Cleaning] (P231)
• [Level Gauge Adjust.] (P232)
• [Format] (P31)
> [Setup]
[Online Manual]
[World Time]
MENU
221
9. Using Menu Functions
• If you are using Daylight Savings [ ], press 3. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.)
To return to the normal time, press 3 again.
• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time
difference from the home area.
[Travel Date]
[Travel Setup]
If you set [Travel Setup], elapsed days of your trip (i.e. which day of the
trip) based on its departure and return dates will be recorded.
• The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the
return date.
If the [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], [Location] will also be set to [OFF].
[Location]
If you set [Location], the name of the travel destination that you enter will
be recorded.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• You can display the elapsed days and travel destination during playback or stamp them on
recorded pictures in [Text Stamp].
• The elapsed days and travel destination can be printed out using the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.
If you set [World Time] to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the date in
the clock setting and the travel destination setting.
• The [Travel Date] feature is disabled when recording [AVCHD] motion pictures.
• [Location] cannot be recorded in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
9. Using Menu Functions
222
This enables/disables the WIRELESS connection lamp.
If you select [OFF], they will not light/flash.
This allows you to set the electronic sound and the electronic shutter sound.
Settings: [Beep Volume]/[E-Shutter Vol]/[E-Shutter Tone]
[Wi-Fi]
[Wi-Fi Function] P250 [Wi-Fi Setup] P291
[Bluetooth]
[Bluetooth] P254, P255 [Location Logging] P268
[Remote Wakeup] P260 [Auto Clock Set] P269
[Auto Transfer] P264
[Wi-Fi network
settings]
P265
[Wireless Connection Lamp]
[Beep]
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [E-Shutter Vol] are set to [OFF].
223
9. Using Menu Functions
[Economy]
[Sleep Mode]
The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been used for
the time selected on the setting.
[Sleep
Mode(Wi-Fi)]
The camera is automatically turned off if it is not connected to a Wi-Fi
network and has not been used for 15 minutes (approx.).
[Auto LVF/
Monitor Off]
The monitor/viewfinder is automatically turned off if the camera has not
been used for the time selected on the setting.
[Power Save LVF
Shooting]
If you display the monitor using the viewfinder/monitor automatic switching
function, the camera will turn off automatically after being left idle.
[Time]
Sets the amount of time before the camera turns off
automatically.
[10SEC]/[5SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
• When not using [Power Save LVF Shooting], select [OFF].
[Display]
Sets whether to turn off the camera automatically only while the
[Monitor Info. Disp.] screen is displayed or while any screen is
displayed.
[Only Monitor Info.]:
Sets the camera to turn off automatically only when [Monitor
Info. Disp.] is displayed.
[All Live View]:
Sets the camera to turn off automatically when any screen is
displayed.
• To cancel [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] or [Power Save LVF Shooting], perform either of
the following operations:
– Press the shutter button halfway.
– Turn off and on the camera.
• To turn the monitor/viewfinder on again, press any button.
• [Economy] does not work in the following cases.
– When connecting to a PC or a printer
– When recording or playing back motion pictures
– During a slide show
– When recording with [6K/4K Pre-Burst]
– When recording in [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When using the HDMI output during recording
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] and [Power Save
LVF Shooting] are disabled.
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] is fixed to [5MIN.].
9. Using Menu Functions
224
This sets the monitor frame rate.
This sets the viewfinder frame rate.
This displays the monitor and viewfinder screens in red. It reduces the difficulty in seeing
the surroundings caused by brightly-lit screens at night or in any low-light environment.
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select [ON] for the red display setting of the monitor or
viewfinder (LVF).
2 Press [DISP.] to display the brightness adjustment screen.
3 Press 2/1 to adjust the brightness, and press [MENU/SET].
[Monitor Display Speed]
[30fps] Reduces the power consumption, extending the operating time.
[60fps] Displays movements smoother.
• When [Monitor Display Speed] is set to [30fps], the monitor image quality may be lower than
when it is set to [60fps], but this does not affect the recorded image.
[LVF Display Speed]
[60fps] Reduces the power consumption, extending the operating time.
[120fps] Displays movements smoother.
• [LVF 120] is displayed on the viewfinder when it is displayed at [120fps].
• When [LVF Display Speed] is set to [120fps], the viewfinder image quality is lower than when it
is set to [60fps], but this does not affect the recorded image.
• Images are displayed at [60fps] in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– During playback
– During Creative Video Mode
– When recording in Burst Mode
(only when [Burst Shot Setting] is set to [SH2]/[SH1]/[SH2 PRE]/[SH1 PRE])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– During HDMI output
[Night Mode]
• This mode does not affect recorded images.
• This effect is not applied to images output via HDMI.
225
9. Using Menu Functions
Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the Monitor/viewfinder is adjusted.
1 Select the settings by pressing 3/4, and adjust with 2/1.
2 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
[Monitor Display]/[Viewfinder]
• It will adjust the monitor when the monitor is in use, and the viewfinder when the viewfinder is
in use.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.
[Monitor Luminance]
„ [AUTO]
The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright it is
around the camera.
[MODE1] Make the monitor brighter.
[MODE2] Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
[MODE3] Make the monitor darker.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.
• The monitor automatically returns to standard brightness if no operations are performed for
30 seconds when recording in [MODE1]. It will light up brightly again with button or touch
operation.
• When [AUTO] or [MODE1] is set, the usage time is reduced.
• [AUTO] is only available in the Recording Mode.
• The initial setting when using the AC adaptor (optional) is [MODE2].
Not available in these cases:
• [Monitor Luminance] is not available when [Night Mode] is set.
[Status-LCD Backlight]
[H] Brightens the status LCD backlight.
[L] Dims the status LCD backlight.
[OFF] Turns off the status LCD backlight.
…
1
…
2
…
3
9. Using Menu Functions
226
Sets the communication method when connecting using the USB connection cable
(supplied).
Supplies power via the USB connection cable when the camera is connected to a PC.
[Eye Sensor]
[Sensitivity] This will set the sensitivity of the eye sensor.
[LVF/Monitor
Switch]
This will set the method for switching between the monitor and viewfinder.
[LVF/MON AUTO] (automatic switching between the monitor and
viewfinder)/
[LVF] (viewfinder)/[MON] (monitor)
• If you press [LVF] to switch the display, the [LVF/Monitor Switch] setting will
also switch.
[USB Mode]
y [Select on
connection]
Select this setting to select the USB communication system when
connecting to another device.
z [PC(Storage)] Select this setting to export images to a connected PC.
[PC(Tether)]
Select this setting to control the camera from a PC installed with
supported software.
{ [PictBridge(PTP)] Select this setting when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
[USB Power Supply]
• Even if this item is set to [OFF], power will be supplied when the AC adaptor (supplied) is
connected.
227
9. Using Menu Functions
[HDMI Mode (Play)]:
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the HDMI compatible TV and monitor
connected with this unit using the HDMI cable.
[HDMI Info Display (Rec)]:
Sets whether to display or hide information while monitoring the camera image being
recorded on a TV connected with an HDMI cable.
(P296)
[VIERA Link]:
If you select [ON], operations of the camera and the VIERA Link compatible equipment
connected to the camera with an HDMI cable are automatically linked, enabling you to control
the camera with the remote control of the VIERA Link compatible equipment.
Set the language displayed on the screen.
This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked.
[TV Connection]
[AUTO]
Outputs images at an output resolution suited to the
connected TV.
[4K/60p]/[4K/30p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/
[720p]/[480p]
Outputs images at the selected resolution.
• The output resolution for [4K/60p] and [4K/30p] is
3840k2160.
• This will work only during playback.
• If no image appears on your TV when [AUTO] is set, switch to a setting other than [AUTO] that
can display images on the TV.
[Language]
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired
language.
[Version Disp.]
• To display information about the software on the unit, press [MENU/SET] on the version
display screen.
9. Using Menu Functions
228
Set the folder and file name patterns in which images are to be saved.
¢ When [Double Slot Function] is set to [Allocation Rec], [Select Folder (SD1)] and [Select
Folder (SD2)] are displayed.
[Folder / File Settings]
Folder name File name
1
Folder number (3-digits, 100–999)
1
Color space ([P]: sRGB, [_]: AdobeRGB)
2
5-digit user-defined segment
2
3-digit user-defined segment
3
File number (4-digits, 0001–9999)
4
File extension
[Select Folder]
¢
Specifies the folder to which images are to be saved.
• The folder name is indicated with the number of files that can be stored.
[Create a New
Folder]
[OK]
Creates a new folder with the same 5-digit user-defined
segment as the current folder name setting.
[Change]
Allows you to redefine the 5-digit user-defined segment
before creating a new folder.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),
numbers, and [ _ ]
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• A new folder with an incremented folder number is created.
• If there are no recordable folders in the card, a screen for resetting the
folder number is displayed.
[File Name
Setting]
[Folder
Number Link]
Uses the folder number of the folder name as the file
name’s 3-digit user-defined segment.
[User Setting]
Allows you to define and set the 3-digit user-defined
segment of the file name.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters),
numbers, and [ _ ]
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
100ABCDE
PABC0001.JPG
229
9. Using Menu Functions
Set the way recording to the card slots 1 and 2 is performed.
• Each folder can store up to 1000 files.
• File numbers are assigned sequentially from 0001 to 9999 in the order of recording. If you
change the storage folder, a continuing number from the last file number will be assigned.
• In the following cases, a new folder with an incremented folder number will be created
automatically when the next file is saved:
– The current folder contains 1000 files
– The current folder contains a file with the file number “9999”
• New folders cannot be created when there are folders numbered from 100 all the way up to
999. In this case, we recommend saving their data to a computer or similar device and
formatting the card.
[Double Slot Function]
[Recording
Method]
([Relay Rec])
Relays recording to the other card slot even after the first card
runs out of free space during recording.
[Destination Slot]: [ ]/[ ]
• If you keep replacing the full card before the other card runs
out of free space during motion picture recording, you can
perform recording for a long period of time using 3 or more
cards. Replace the card when there is still sufficient free space
left on the card being used for recording.
([Backup Rec])
Records same images to the two cards.
([Allocation
Rec])
Allows you to specify the card slot to be used for recording for
different image formats.
[JPEG Destination]/[RAW Destination]/[6K/4K Photo
Destination]/[Video Destination]
Notes on the Relay Rec. function
• In the following cases, recording cannot be relayed to the other card:
– When recording a motion picture in [AVCHD] format
Notes on the Backup Rec. function
• We recommend using cards with the same Speed Class rating and capacity.
• When recording a motion picture in [AVCHD] format, backup recording of motion picture is not
possible. Data will be recorded only to the one card.
• When different types of cards (SDHC/SDXC) are inserted in any of the following situations,
recording cannot be performed to the cards:
– When recording motion pictures (Excluding [AVCHD])
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
9. Using Menu Functions
230
Save the camera’s setup information to the card. Since saved setup information can be
imported to the camera, you can apply the same setup to more than one camera.
• Save/load setup information using the card inserted to the card slot 1.
• The setup information of the menu items below cannot be saved/loaded.
Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.
Settings: [Slot 1]/[Slot 2]
[Save/Restore Camera Setting]
[Save]
Saves the camera’s setup information to the card.
• To save new information, select [New File]; to overwrite an existing file,
select that file.
• When [New File] has been selected, the name of the file to be saved is
displayed on the screen.
[OK]
Saves the file with an automatically created name
displayed on the screen.
[Change the
file name]
Allows you to rename the file before saving it.
• Available characters: alphabet (upper case characters)
and numbers; up to 8 characters
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
[Load] Loads the setup information on the card to the camera.
[Delete] Deletes the setup information on the card.
[Custom] • Data registered with [Face Recog.]
[Setup]
• [Clock Set]
•[World Time]
• [Travel Date]
• [Wi-Fi Setup] in [Wi-Fi]
• [Bluetooth]
• [Monitor Display]
• [Viewfinder]
• [Level Gauge Adjust.]
• Setup information can be loaded only to cameras of the same model as this camera.
• You can save up to 10 sets of setup information to one card.
[No.Reset]
• When recording is performed after resetting this item, the folder number is updated and the
file number starts from 0001.
• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.
The folder number should be reset before it reaches 999. We recommend formatting the card
after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.
• To reset the folder number to 100:
1 Perform [Format] to format the card.
2 Perform [No.Reset] to reset the file number.
3 Select [Yes] on the folder number reset screen.
231
9. Using Menu Functions
The following settings are reset to the default:
– Recording settings
– Setup settings ([Wi-Fi Setup] and [Bluetooth] settings)
– Custom settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
– Setup/custom settings (except for [Wi-Fi Setup], [Bluetooth], [Face Recog.] and [Profile
Setup])
The following network settings are reset to the default:
– [Wi-Fi Setup] (Excluding [LUMIX CLUB] )
– Registered device information in [Bluetooth] and values in [Wi-Fi network settings]
It will perform optimization of imaging device and image processing.
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to the front of the imaging
device is performed.
[Reset]
• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset.
– The [World Time] setting
– The settings of [Travel Date] (departure date, return date, location)
– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback]
menu
• The folder number and the clock setting are not changed.
[Reset Network Settings]
• Always reset the camera when disposing or selling it to prevent personal information saved
within the camera from being misused.
• Always reset the camera after making a copy of personal information when sending the
camera in to be repaired.
[Pixel Refresh]
• Imaging device and image processing is optimized when the camera is purchased. Use this
function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
[Sensor Cleaning]
• Dust Reduction Function will operate automatically when the camera is turned on, but you can
use this function when you see dust.
9. Using Menu Functions
232
Register frequently-used menus and display them in [My Menu]. You can register up to 23
menus.
[Level Gauge Adjust.]
[Adjust.]
Hold the camera in a horizontal position, and press [MENU/SET]. The
level gauge will be adjusted.
[Level Gauge
Value Reset]
Restores the default level gauge setting.
:
[My Menu] menu
[My Menu Setting]
> [My Menu] > [My Menu Setting]
[Add] Specifies the menu to be displayed in My Menu to register it.
[Sorting]
Rearranges the menus displayed in My Menu. Select the menu you want to
move and set the destination.
[Delete]
Deletes registered menus from the displayed menu list.
[Delete Item]: Deletes a selected menu from the displayed menu list.
[Delete All]: Deletes all of the displayed menus.
[Display from
My Menu]
Sets the type of the menu screen to be displayed.
[ON]: Displays My Menu.
[OFF]: Displays the last-used menu.
MENU
233
9. Using Menu Functions
∫ How to select an image(s) after selecting [Single] or [Multi]
• When [Single] and [Multi] are not available, select an image in the same way as when [Single]
is selected.
:
[Playback] menu
• [Slide Show]
(P234)
• [Playback Mode] (P235)
• [Protect] (P236)
• [Rating] (P236)
• [Title Edit] (P237)
• [Face Rec Edit] (P237)
• [RAW Processing] (P238)
• [6K/4K PHOTO Bulk Saving] (P126)
• [6K/4K PHOTO Noise Reduction] (P126)
• [Light Composition] (P241)
• [Clear Retouch] (P242)
• [Text Stamp] (P243)
•[Copy] (P244)
•[Resize] (P245)
• [Cropping] (P246)
• [Rotate] (P247)
• [Video Divide] (P247)
• [Time Lapse Video] (P248)
• [Stop Motion Video] (P248)
• [Rotate Disp.] (P248)
•[Picture Sort] (P249)
• [Delete Confirmation] (P249)
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.
[Single] setting
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2 Press [MENU/SET].
• If [Set/Cancel] is displayed at the right bottom of the
screen, the setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is
pressed again.
[Multi] setting
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET] (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
2 Press [DISP.] to execute.
When a screen similar to the one on the right is displayed:
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can switch
the displayed card by pressing [Fn1].
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
Fn1
2.
Fn1
6HW&DQFHO
9. Using Menu Functions
234
You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronization with music, and you can
do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.
You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion
pictures, etc.
We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a
TV.
1 Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Picture Only], 6K/4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus
function will also be played back.
• For images recorded with the Post Focus function, only an in-focus representative image
will be chosen and played back.
2 Press 3 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
∫ Operations during a slide show
[Slide Show]
> [Playback] > [Slide Show]
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of
operation
3 Play/Pause 4 Exit slide show
2
Back to previous
picture
1 Ahead to next picture
Reduce volume level
Increase volume
level
MENU
235
9. Using Menu Functions
∫ Changing the slide show settings
You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the
slide show menu screen.
• When playing back the following pictures, the [Effect] setting is disabled.
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
• When playing back the following pictures, the [Duration] setting is disabled.
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
Playback in [Normal Play], [Picture Only] or [Video Only] can be selected.
Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Picture Only], 6K/4K burst files and images recorded with the Post Focus function
will also be played back.
[Effect]
This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one
picture to the next.
[Setup]
[Duration]
• [Duration] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected
as the [Effect] setting.
[Repeat] [ON]/[OFF]
[Sound]
[AUTO]:
Music is played when the still pictures are played back,
and audio is played when the motion pictures are played
back.
[Music]:
Music is played back.
[Audio]:
Audio (only for motion pictures) is played back.
[OFF]:
There will be no sound.
[Playback Mode]
> [Playback] > [Playback Mode]
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
236
You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.
Select the picture.
(P233)
• [999+] is displayed on the screen, if the total number of protects you set for a group pictures is
more than 1000 pictures.
∫ Canceling all the [Protect] settings
Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can only cancel the setting of images on one card at a time.
You can set five different rating levels for images to do the following:
• Delete all the pictures not set as ratings.
• Checking the rating level on the file detail display of an operating system, such as Windows 10,
Windows 8.1, or Windows 8. (JPEG images only)
1 Select the picture. (P233)
2 Press 2/1 to set the rating level (1–5), and press [MENU/SET] to set.
• When [Multi] has been selected, repeat steps
1 and 2 for each picture.
(It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)
• The number of a group pictures will be displayed, if you set for a group pictures. [999+] is
displayed, if the group pictures is more than 1000 pictures.
∫ Canceling all the [Rating] settings
Press 3/4 to select [Cancel], and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can only cancel the setting of images on one card at a time.
• In [Playback Mode], the [Cancel] is disabled.
[Protect]
> [Playback] > [Protect]
Even if you do not protect pictures on a card, they cannot be deleted when the
card’s Write-Protect switch is set to [LOCK].
• The [Protect] feature is only designed to work with this camera.
• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.
[Rating]
> [Playback] > [Rating]
• Only the rating level “5” can be set for motion pictures in [AVCHD] format.
MENU
MENU
237
9. Using Menu Functions
You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped
in prints using [Text Stamp].
1 Select the picture. (P233)
•[’] is displayed for pictures with titles already registered.
2 Enter the text. (P64)
You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.
1 Press 3/4 to select [REPLACE] or [DELETE], and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 2/1 to select the person and then press [MENU/SET].
4 (When [REPLACE] is selected)
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to replace and then press [MENU/SET].
[Title Edit]
> [Playback] > [Title Edit]
• To delete the title, erase all the text in the text input screen.
• You can print out texts (comments) using the software “ PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
[Face Rec Edit]
> [Playback] > [Face Rec Edit]
• Cleared information regarding the [Face Recog.] cannot be restored.
• The Face Recognition information of pictures in a group has to be edited at once.
(You cannot edit one picture at a time.)
• Editing of group pictures can be performed only on the first picture of each set.
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
238
You can process the pictures taken in RAW format. The processed pictures will be saved
in JPEG format.
1 Select RAW images with 2/1, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4 to select an item.
• You can set the following items. The settings you used for
the recording are selected when you start setting these
items.
[RAW Processing]
> [Playback] > [RAW Processing]
[White Balance]
Allows you to select a White Balance preset and adjust it. If you
select an item with [ ], you can process the image with the setting
at the time of recording.
[Brightness
correction]
Allows you to correct the brightness within the range between j2EV
and i2EV.
[Photo Style] Allows you to select a photo style effect.
[i.Dynamic] Allows you to select an [i.Dynamic] setting.
[Contrast] Allows you to adjust the contrast.
[Highlight] Allows you to adjust the brightness of bright portions.
[Shadow] Allows you to adjust the brightness of dark portions.
[Saturation]/[Color
Tone]
Allows you to adjust the saturation. (When [Monochrome] or
[L.Monochrome] is selected in [Photo Style], you can adjust the color
tone.)
[Filter Effect]
Allows you to select a filter effect. (Only when [Monochrome] or
[L.Monochrome] is selected in [Photo Style])
[Noise Reduction] Allows you to adjust the noise reduction setting.
[i.Resolution] Allows you to select an [i.Resolution] setting.
[Sharpness] Allows you to adjust the resolution effect.
[Setup]
You can set the following items:
[Reinstate Adjustments]:
Returns the settings to the ones you used during the recording.
[Color Space]:
Allows you to select a [Color Space] setting from [sRGB] or [Adobe
RGB].
[Picture Size]:
Allows you to select the size in which the image will be saved in
JPEG format.
MENU
239
9. Using Menu Functions
3 Press [MENU/SET] and set.
• Refer to “How to set each item” on P239.
4 Press [MENU/SET].
• This operation returns you to the screen in step
2. To set other items, repeat steps 2
through
4.
5 Select [Begin Processing] with 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
∫ How to set each item
• When [Noise Reduction], [i.Resolution] or [Sharpness] is selected, the comparison screen
cannot be displayed.
• Each time you touch the screen twice, the display switches between enlarged and normal view.
On the comparison screen, you can use the following operations to make adjustments:
A Current setting
• If you touch the picture at the center, it will be enlarged. If you touch [ ], the picture will be
reduced to the original size.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1
/
Dragging Selects a setting.
3
[WB K
Set]
Displays the screen that lets you
set the color temperature. (only
when [White Balance] is set to
[ ], [ ], [ ], [ ])
4 [Adjust.]
Displays the screen that lets you
fine-adjust the White Balance.
(only when [White Balance] is set)
[DISP.] [DISP.] Displays the comparison screen.
[MENU/SET] [Set]
Sets the adjusted level and returns
you to the item selection screen.
Button
operation
Touch
operation
Description of operation
2/1
/
Dragging Selects a setting.
[DISP.] [DISP.] Returns you to the setting screen.
[MENU/SET] [Set]
Sets the adjusted level and returns
you to the item selection screen.
+1
+1
+1 +2
+2
+2
-
2
-
2
-
2
-
1
-
1
-
10
0
0
DISP.
DISP.
AWBc
AWBc
AWB
AWB
WBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWBWB
AWBAWB
1
2
3
4
DISP.
0
9. Using Menu Functions
240
[Setup] setting
When you select an item, the screen that asks you to select [Reinstate Adjustments],
[Color Space], or [Picture Size] will be displayed.
1 Press 3/4 to select an item, and press [MENU/SET].
• If you select [Reinstate Adjustments], a confirmation screen will be displayed. Selecting
[Yes] will execute the operation and return you to the item selection screen.
2 Press 3/4 to select a setting, and press [MENU/SET].
• The effects applied through the RAW processing on the camera and those applied through the
RAW processing on the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” are not completely identical.
• RAW images recorded with the camera are always recorded in the [4:3] (5184k3888) aspect
ratio. When you process them with [RAW Processing] in the [Playback] menu, however, their
aspect ratio and [Ex. Tele Conv.] settings at the time of recording will be applied to them.
• Zoomed-in images recorded with [Ex. Tele Conv.] cannot be processed if you select a [Picture
Size] setting larger than their size at the time of recording.
• The [White Balance] setting of pictures taken with multiple exposures is fixed to the setting at
the time of recording.
• The [Brightness correction] effect differs from the effect of exposure compensation during
recording.
Not available in these cases:
• [RAW Processing] is not available when an HDMI cable is connected.
• You can process only the RAW images you recorded with the camera.
241
9. Using Menu Functions
Select multiple frames from 6K/4K burst files that you wish to combine. Parts of the image
that are brighter than the preceding frame will be superimposed on the preceding frame to
combine the frames into one picture.
1 Press 2/1 to select the 6K/4K photo burst files and press [MENU/SET].
2 Choose the combining method, and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Select [Yes] at the confirmation screen, and then press [MENU/SET].
The combined picture is displayed.
• Pictures are saved in JPEG format. Recording information (Exif information) of the first
frame such as shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity are also registered.
[Light Composition]
> [Playback] > [Light Composition]
[Composite Merging] setting
Select the frames you want to combine to superimpose brighter parts.
1 Select the frames.
For information on button and touch operation, refer to
P128.
• Images displayed cannot be enlarged or shrunk or
shown as in slide view.
• [ ]/[ ] in touch operation becomes [ ].
2 Press [MENU/SET].
The selected frames are remembered, and the display
goes to the preview screen.
Press 3/4 to select items and press [MENU/SET] to
perform the following operations.
– [Next]: Lets you select more frames for combining.
Goes back to step 1.
– [Reselect]: Discards the frame selected immediately
before and lets you select a different image.
– [Save]: Ends frame selection
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select more frames to combine.
• You can select up to 40 frames.
4 Press 4 to select [Save], and then press [MENU/SET].
[Range Merging] setting
Select the first and last frames to superimpose the brighter parts of the frames
between them.
1 Select the frame of the first picture, and press [MENU/SET].
The selection method is the same as in step 1 of [Composite Merging] setting.
2 Select the frame of the last picture, and press [MENU/SET].
MENU
1H[W
5HVHOHFW
6DYH
9. Using Menu Functions
242
• The erasure operation can only be performed
by touching. [Clear Retouch] automatically
enables the touch operation.
1 Press 2/1 to select a picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Drag your finger over the part you want to delete.
• The parts to be erased are colored.
• To return the colored part back to its previous state, touch
[Undo].
3 Touch [Set].
4 Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET].
[Clear Retouch]
> [Playback] > [Clear
Retouch]
Erasing details (enlarging the display)
1 Touch [SCALING].
• Pinching out/pinching in the screen allows you to
enlarge/reduce it.
• Dragging the screen allows you to move the
enlarged part.
2 Touch [REMOVE].
• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging
your finger over the part you want to delete. The part
you want to delete can be dragged even while the picture is enlarged.
• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.
• For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture.
(They cannot be edited at once.)
• When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures
separate from the original ones.
Not available in these cases:
• Not available when the viewfinder is in use.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures taken with [ ]
MENU
6&$/,1*
5(029(
6HW8QGR
6&$/,1*
5(029(
6HW8QGR
243
9. Using Menu Functions
You can stamp recording information on recorded images.
1 Select the picture. (P233)
•[‘] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.
2 Press 3/4 to select [Set], and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen.
4 Press 3 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET].
[Text Stamp]
> [Playback] > [Text Stamp]
[Shooting Date] Stamps the recording date.
[Name]
[] ([Face Recognition]):
Name registered in [Face Recog.] will be stamped.
[] ([Baby/Pet]):
Name registered in [Profile Setup] will be stamped.
[Location] Stamps the travel destination name set under [Location].
[Travel Date] Stamps the travel date set under [Travel Date].
[Title] Title input in the [Title Edit] will be stamped.
• When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you
specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out.
• When you stamp pictures in a group, the stamped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]
LISA
LISA
LISA
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
244
Copy images on the card to the other card.
1 Press 3/4 to select [Copy Direction], and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4 to select the copying method, and copy images.
• Copied images will be saved in a new folder.
∫ Using a function button to copy images
When images are displayed one at a time, press the function button to which [Copy] is
assigned to copy the displayed image from the card that is playing it back to the other
card.
• If the image is not in a group, select the copy destination folder using one of the following
methods:
[Copy]
> [Playback] > [Copy]
Copies card slot 1 images to the card slot 2.
Copies card slot 2 images to the card slot 1.
[Select Copy]
Copies selected images.
1 Select the folder containing the images to copy.
2 Select the picture.
(P233)
• Select images in the same way as when [Multi] is selected.
[Copy All in Folder]
Copies all images in a folder.
1 Select the folder to copy.
2 After checking the images to copy, press [MENU/SET] to
start the operation.
[Copy All in Card] Copies all images on the card.
[Same Folder No.
as Source]
Copies the image to a folder with the same name.
[Create a New
Folder]
Creates a new folder with an incremented folder number and copies to
it.
[Select Folder] Specifies the folder to which the image is to be saved and copies to it.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Select Copy].
• The [Protect] setting in the [Playback] menu will not be copied.
• It may take some time to finish copying.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures in [AVCHD] format cannot be copied.
• The following types of images cannot be copied from an SDXC memory card to an SD
memory card or SDHC memory card.
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
MENU
245
9. Using Menu Functions
To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of
pixels) is reduced.
[Resize]
> [Playback] > [Resize]
Select the picture and size.
[Single] setting
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press
[MENU/SET].
[Multi] setting
1 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is canceled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
3 Press [DISP.] to execute.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can
switch the displayed card by pressing [Fn1].
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Group Pictures
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]
MENU
20
20
20
5
5
10
10
10
L
4:3
M
4:3
S
4:3
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
Fn1
2.
9. Using Menu Functions
246
You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Use the rear dial and press 3/4/2/1 to select the parts to be cropped.
• You can also touch [ ]/[ ] to enlarge/reduce.
• You can also move by dragging on the screen.
3 Press [MENU/SET].
[Cropping]
> [Playback] > [Cropping]
Rear dial (right): Enlargement
Rear dial (left): Reduction
3/4/2/1: Move
• The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate.
• Crop one picture at a time when you want to crop the pictures in a picture group.
(You cannot edit all pictures in a group at once.)
• When you crop pictures in a group, the cropped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
• Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images
having undergone [Cropping].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]
MENU
247
9. Using Menu Functions
Rotate pictures manually in 90o steps.
• The [Rotate] function is disabled when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Select the rotation direction.
[]:
The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o.
[]:
The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o.
Recorded motion picture and 6K/4K burst files can be divided in two. It is recommended
for when you want to divide a part you need with a part you do not need.
Dividing a file is permanent. Decide before you divide!
1 Press 2/1 to select the file to divide, and then press [MENU/SET].
[Rotate] (The picture is rotated manually.)
> [Playback] > [Rotate]
[Video Divide]
> [Playback] > [Video Divide]
2 Press 3 at the location to divide.
• You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing
2/1 while the file is paused.
3 Press 4.
• The file may be lost if the card or battery is removed while
processing the dividing.
Not available in these cases:
• It may not be possible to divide a file at a point near the beginning or end.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When the recording time is short.
MENU
MENU
9. Using Menu Functions
248
This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with
[Time Lapse Shot].
1 Select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group with 2/1 , and then press [MENU/
SET].
2 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• Refer to P140 for details.
A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with [Stop Motion Animation].
1 Select the Stop Motion Animation group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• Refer to
P140 for details.
This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they were recorded holding the
camera vertically.
[Time Lapse Video]
> [Playback] > [Time Lapse Video]
[Stop Motion Video]
> [Playback] > [Stop Motion Video]
[Rotate Disp.] (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed.)
> [Playback] > [Rotate Disp.] > [ON]
Not available in these cases:
• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless
the OS or software is compatible with Exif.
Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc. to be added. It was
established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association)”.
MENU
MENU
MENU
249
9. Using Menu Functions
You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first when the confirmation screen
for deleting a picture is displayed.
It is set to [“No” first] at the time of purchase.
[Picture Sort]
> [Playback] > [Picture Sort]
[FILE NAME]
Displays images by folder name/file name. This display format allows you
to locate images in the card easily.
[DATE/TIME]
Displays images by recording date. If the card contains pictures taken with
more than one camera, this display format is convenient for looking for
images.
• When you insert another card, images may not be displayed by [DATE/TIME] first. The
images will be displayed by [DATE/TIME] if you wait for a while.
[Delete Confirmation]
> [Playback] > [Delete Confirmation]
[“Yes” first] [Yes] is highlighted first, so deletion can be done quickly.
[“No” first] [No] is highlighted first. Accidental deletion of pictures is avoided.
MENU
MENU
250
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
What you can do with the Wi-Fi
®
/Bluetooth
®
function
This owner’s manual refer to both smartphones and tablets as smartphones from this point
on unless noted otherwise.
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet (P260)
• Recording with a smartphone (P261)
• Playing back or saving images stored on
the camera, or uploading them on social
media sites
(P263)
Explore more enjoyment possibilities
with Bluetooth
®
You can connect to a smartphone that
supports Bluetooth low energy any time.
Connect to a smartphone to use a full range
of features.
•
Connecting easily by pairing (P254)
• Turning on/off the camera by remote
control
(P260)
• Operating the shutter button of the
camera
(P262)
• Sending recorded images automatically
(P264)
• Auto Cloud Backup (P265)
• Recording location information to the
camera’s images
(P268)
• Synchronizing the camera’s clock (P269)
• Saving the camera’s setup information to a smartphone (P269)
Displaying pictures on a TV
(P270)
Printing Wirelessly
(P274)
Sending images to AV device
(P275)
Sending images to PC
(P276)
Using Web services
(P278)
251
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Wi-Fi function/Bluetooth function
∫ Before Use
• Set the clock before using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function.
(P38)
• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device equipped
with the wireless LAN function is required.
∫ About the WIRELESS connection lamp
• In [Wireless Connection Lamp] in the [Setup] menu, you can set the lamp so that it will not light/
flash.
(P222)
∫ About the [Wi-Fi] button
In this owner’s manual, a function button to which [Wi-Fi] is assigned is referred to as the
[Wi-Fi] button.
(By default, [Wi-Fi] is assigned to [Fn6] when the camera is in Recording Mode, while it is
assigned to [Fn1] when the camera is in Playback Mode.)
• For information about the function button, refer to
P60.
Steps for pressing [Wi-Fi] (in Recording Mode)
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch [ ].
When the camera is not connected to Wi-Fi, press [Wi-Fi]. The camera will then be
ready to be connected to the smartphone. You can connect the camera directly to
the smartphone.
(P256)
• When the camera is ready to be connected, you can press [DISP.] to connect with the same
settings as used previously. This is a convenient and quick way to establish a connection.
(P289)
Lit blue
Wi-Fi
When the Wi-Fi function is ON or
connected by Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
When the Bluetooth function is ON or
connected by Bluetooth
Blinking blue When sending data
Fn10
Fn10
Fn10
Fn7
Fn7
Fn7
Fn6
Fn6
Fn6
Fn8
Fn8
Fn8
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fn9
Fn9
Fn9
Fn6
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
252
After connecting to a Wi-Fi network, you can perform the following operations by
pressing [Wi-Fi]:
• Depending on the Wi-Fi function being used or the connection destination, you may not be able
to perform some of these operations.
∫ Describing method
When “select [Select a destination from History]”, etc. is
described in a step, perform any of the following operations.
[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
[Change the Destination]
Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select
a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending
Images]
Refer to P272 for details.
[Register the Current Destination
to Favorite]
Registering the current connection destination or the
connection method, you can easily connect with the same
connection method next time.
[Network Address] Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
Button operation: Select [Select a destination from History]
with the cursor button, and then press
[MENU/SET].
Touch operation: Touch [Select a destination from History].
• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.
• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security.
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery when sending images.
• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start
or the connection may be disrupted.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred
depending on the details of your contract.
• Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is
terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.
• Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception
while sending images.
253
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Connecting to a smartphone/tablet
• You need to install “Panasonic Image App” (referred to as “Image App” from this point on) on
your smartphone.
The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic.
•OS
• Use the latest version.
• Supported OSs are current as of November 2017 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
• When you operate the “Image App” on the smartphone that is connected to the camera via
Wi-Fi, [Help] in the “Image App” may not be displayed depending on the smartphone. In this
case, after terminating the connection to the camera, reconnect the smartphone to a mobile
phone network such as the 3G or LTE network or to a Wi-Fi router, and then display [Help] in
the “Image App”.
• Some of the screens and information provided in this owner’s manual may differ from your
device depending on the supported OS and “Image App” version.
• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being
used.
For information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be
incurred depending on the details of your contract.
Using a smartphones that supports Bluetooth low energy P254
Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth low energy P256
Connecting without using the password P256
Using a password to set up a connection P257
Using the QR code to set up a connection
P257
Manually entering a password to set up a connection
P258
Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Image App”
App for Android
TM
:
Android 4.2 or higher
(Android 5.0 or higher is required to use the Bluetooth function)
App for iOS:
iOS 9.0 or higher
(The Bluetooth function cannot be used with the iPad 2)
1 Connect the smartphone to a network.
2 (Android) Select “Google Play
TM
Store”.
(iOS) Select “App Store”.
3 Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” into the search box.
4 Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it.
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
254
Follow a simple connection setup procedure (pairing) to connect to a smartphone that
supports Bluetooth low energy. When pairing is set up, the camera also automatically
connects to the smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• Supported smartphones
• The camera enters pairing standby mode and displays its device
name.
1 Start “ Image App”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close
the message.
2 Select [Bluetooth].
3 Turn on the Bluetooth.
4 Select the device name displayed on the camera’s screen from the [Camera
enable to be registered] list.
• Bluetooth connection between the camera and the smartphone will be made.
(For Android devices) A Wi-Fi connection will be made by selecting [Connection].
5 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting
menu.
6 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID (the device
name selected in step
4) displayed on the camera.
• If the SSID is not displayed, it may be displayed after the Wi-Fi
function is turned off and on.
7 Press the home button, and select “Image App” to display
“Image App”.
Using a smartphones that supports Bluetooth low energy
Android: Android 5.0 or higher equipped with Bluetooth 4.0 or higher (excluding
those that do not support Bluetooth low energy)
iOS: iOS 9.0 or higher (excluding the iPad 2)
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] >
[SET] > [Pairing]
On your smartphone
If you are using an Android device, follow the steps up to here to complete the setup.
Proceed to the steps below only if you are using an iOS device (iPhone/iPod touch/iPad).
• If [Wi-Fi Password]
(P291) is set to [OFF] on the camera, select [Wi-Fi Setup]. (At the time
of purchase, [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF])
• If [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON] on the camera, you need to install the profile.
1 Install the profile.
• If a pass code is set on the smartphone, you need to enter it.
2 Press the home button to close the browser.
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
255
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
• The paired smartphone will be registered as a paired device after connected via Wi-Fi.
• Pairing needs to be set up only for the first connection. For the second and subsequent
connections:
(P255)
∫ Connecting to the paired smartphone (connecting for the second and subsequent
times)
1 Start “ Image App”.
• If a message is displayed indicating that the smartphone is searching for cameras, close
the message.
2 Select [Bluetooth].
3 Turn on the Bluetooth.
4 Select the camera (device name) you want to connect to from the [Camera
registered] list.
• Even if you set up pairing with more than one smartphone, you can only connect to one
smartphone at a time.
∫ Enabling the Bluetooth function
∫ Terminating the Bluetooth connection to the smartphone and disabling the
Bluetooth function
• The connection will be terminated and the camera’s Bluetooth function will be deactivated.
• Even if you terminate the connection, the pairing information for it will not be deleted.
∫ Deleting the pairing information of a smartphone
1 Select the camera’s menu.
2 Select the smartphone you want to delete.
When connected via Bluetooth, the camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
• (iOS devices) If you need to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen, follow
the on-screen message to change the setting.
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [ON]
On your smartphone
If you set [Bluetooth] to [ON] on the camera in advance, you can make a connection just
by operating the smartphone.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [ON]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [OFF]
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Bluetooth] > [SET] > [Delete]
MENU
MENU
MENU
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
256
Connect to a smartphone via Wi-Fi.
• You can also connect via Wi-Fi to a smartphone that supports Bluetooth low energy by
following the same steps.
You can easily set up a direct connection to your smartphone without entering a password.
A SSID
• When the camera is ready to be connected to the smartphone,
the SSID is displayed.
• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the
camera.
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting
menu.
2 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
3 Start “ Image App”.
• When the connection confirmation screen is displayed on the
camera, select [Yes] to connect. (For first time connection only)
• [ ] is displayed on the recording screen during Bluetooth connection. When the Bluetooth
function is enabled, but a connection is not established, [ ] appears translucent.
• Up to 16 smartphones can be registered. If you try to register more than 16 devices, the
smartphone with the oldest registration history will be replaced.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] will delete registered device information.
Using a smartphone that does not support Bluetooth low energy
Connecting without using the password
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &
View]
On your smartphone
At the time of purchase, [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [OFF].
Before connecting to a Wi-Fi network, ensure that the device displayed on the connection
confirmation screen is the one you actually want to connect to. When a wrong device is
displayed, if you select [Yes], the camera will automatically connect to that device.
We recommend that you set [Wi-Fi Password]
(P291) to [ON] if, for example, there is
another Wi-Fi device nearby.
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
257
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Connecting with a password further enhances security. You can scan a QR code or
manually enter a password to set up a connection.
Preparations: (On the camera)
∫ Using the QR code to set up a connection
A SSID and password
B QR code
• When the camera is ready to be connected to the smartphone,
the QR code, SSID and password are displayed.
• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the
camera.
1 Start “ Image App”.
2 Select [QR code].
• When the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point, it may take time to display
[QR code].
• (For iOS devices) A confirmation screen will be displayed. Select [OK] to proceed.
3 Use the “Image App” to scan the QR code displayed on the screen of the
camera.
• To enlarge the QR code, press [MENU/SET] on the camera.
4 Install the profile.
• If a pass code is set on the smartphone, you need to enter it.
5 Press the home button to close the browser.
6 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting menu.
7 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
8 Press the home button, and select “Image App” to display
“Image App”.
• (iOS devices) Steps
1 through 5 are not required from the second
time on.
Using a password to set up a connection
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [Wi-Fi Password] > [ON]
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &
View]
On your smartphone
If you are using an Android device, follow the steps up to here to complete the setup.
Proceed to the steps below only if you are using an iOS device (iPhone/iPod touch/iPad).
MENU
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
258
∫ Manually entering a password to set up a connection
A SSID and password
B QR code
• When the camera is ready to be connected to the smartphone,
the QR code, SSID and password are displayed.
• You can also display the information by pressing [Wi-Fi] on the
camera.
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting
menu.
2 On the Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on
the camera.
3 Enter the password displayed on the camera into the
smartphone. (For first time connection only)
4 Start “ Image App”.
To change the connection method, follow the steps below:
or
On the camera
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &
View]
On your smartphone
Changing the Wi-Fi connection method
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[New Connection] > [Remote Shooting &
View] > [DISP.] button
> [DISP.] button > [New Connection] >
[Remote Shooting & View] > [DISP.] button
MENU
Wi-Fi
0123456789ABC
MENU
Wi-Fi
259
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
∫ When connecting via a wireless access point ([Via Network]):
1 Select [Via Network].
• Follow the connection procedure described on P286 to connect the camera to a wireless
access point.
2 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setting menu.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point to which the camera is
connected.
4 Start “ Image App”.
∫ When directly connecting the camera and smartphone ([Direct]):
1 Select [Direct].
• Select [WPS Connection], and follow the connection procedure described on
P288 to
connect the camera to the smartphone.
2 Start “ Image App”.
1 Set the camera to Recording Mode.
2 Select the camera’s menu items to terminate the
Wi-Fi connection.
• You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi]
on the camera.
3 On the smartphone, close “Image App”.
On the camera
On your smartphone
On the camera
On your smartphone
Terminating the Wi-Fi connection
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]
> [Yes]
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
260
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet
∫ Required wireless connectivity mode
The wireless connectivity mode required varies depending on the function to be used after
connecting to a smartphone.
The function allows you to view images on the camera
placed in your bag, or turn on the camera left in a
separate place only when you record images with it.
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Select the camera’s menu.
3 Set the camera on/off switch to [OFF].
4 On the smartphone, start up the “Image App”, and set the Bluetooth function to
a state in which a connection can be made (standby state).
5 Operate the smartphone.
• The camera automatically turns on, allowing it to make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.
– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to
change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message
on the smartphone to change the setting.
Wireless connectivity
required
Support for Bluetooth low energy
Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that
support Bluetooth low energy.
Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that do not
support Bluetooth low energy.
Indicates that the function can be used with smartphones that
support Bluetooth low energy.
• Indicates that the function requires you to connect to a smartphone
using both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Turning on/off the camera with a smartphone
Wireless connectivity required:
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Remote Wakeup] > [ON]
1 Select [ ].
2 Select [Remote operation].
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Wi-FiBluetooth
Wi-FiBluetooth
MENU
261
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
∫ Turning off the camera with the smartphone
1 Connect to a smartphone. (P253)
2 Operate the smartphone.
Not available in these cases:
• In the following case, remote recording does not work:
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
1 Select [ ].
2 Select [ OFF].
• When [Remote Wakeup] is set to [ON], the Bluetooth function continues to operate even after
the camera is turned off, thus causing the battery to drain.
Taking images via a smartphone (remote recording)
Wireless connectivity required:
• If the smartphone is already connected via Wi-Fi, proceed
to step 3.
1 (When connected via Bluetooth) Select [ ].
2 (When connected via Bluetooth) Select [Remote
operation].
• Make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.
– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need
to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen
message on the smartphone to change the setting.
3 Select [ ].
4 Record an image.
• The recorded images are saved in the camera.
• Some settings are not available.
Wi-Fi
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
262
∫ Changing the camera’s dial settings, etc. with your smartphone
Set either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during
remote recording.
• The setting of this function cannot be changed while the connection is active.
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Operate the smartphone.
• To cancel [Sleep Mode] with this function, select the following settings and connect via
Bluetooth.
– [Remote Wakeup]: [ON]
– [Auto Transfer]: [OFF]
• When the camera is turned off, even if you set [Remote Wakeup] to [ON] on the camera, it
cannot be turned on with this function.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [Priority of Remote Device]
[Camera]
Allows you to perform operations with both the camera and the smartphone
during remote recording.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. cannot be changed with the smartphone.
[Smartphone]
Allows you to perform operations only with the smartphone during remote
recording.
• The camera’s dial settings, etc. can be changed with the smartphone.
• To end remote recording, press any of the buttons on the camera to turn on
the screen, and select [End].
Operating the shutter button with a smartphone via a Bluetooth
connection alone
Wireless connectivity required:
1 Select [ ].
2 Select [Shutter Remote Control].
3 Remotely operate the shutter button or motion picture
button of the camera.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
• The live view image of the camera cannot be monitored on the smartphone.
MENU
Bluetooth
263
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
1 Connect to a smartphone. (P253)
2 Operate the smartphone.
• When you play a motion picture, image quality differs from
that of the actual recorded motion picture. In addition,
depending on the smartphone or conditions of use, the
image quality may deteriorate or the sound may skip during
motion picture or picture playback.
• An OS version of Android 7.0 or higher or iOS 10.0 or
higher is required to save pictures in RAW format.
• Depending on the smartphone or its OS version, pictures in
RAW format may not be displayed correctly.
• You cannot save the following types of images:
– Motion pictures in [AVCHD], [MP4] (only those with a size of [4K]) format
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
Playing back/saving images stored on the camera, or uploading them
on social media sites
Wireless connectivity required:
• If the smartphone is already connected via Wi-Fi, proceed
to step 3.
1 (When connected via Bluetooth) Select [ ].
2 (When connected via Bluetooth) Select [Remote
operation].
• Make a Wi-Fi connection automatically.
– (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need
to change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen
message on the smartphone to change the setting.
3 Select [ ].
• You can switch the images to be displayed by
selecting the icon (
A
) on the top left of the screen.
To display images stored in the camera, select
[LUMIX(SD1)] or [LUMIX(SD2)].
(To play back the image)
4 Touch the image to enlarge it.
(To save the image or upload it on a social media site
or other web service)
5 Touch and hold an image, and drag it to save it.
Wi-Fi
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
264
The camera automatically transfers recorded images to a Bluetooth-connected
smartphone via Wi-Fi.
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Select the camera’s menu.
• If a confirmation screen is displayed on the camera asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi
connection, select [Yes] to terminate it.
3 On the smartphone, select [Yes] (Android devices) or [Wi-Fi Setup] (iOS
devices).
• The camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi connection.
– (iOS devices) Follow the on-screen message on the smartphone to change the
connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen.
4 Check the send settings on the camera, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.].
(P272)
• The camera will enter a mode where it can automatically transfer images and [ ] will be
displayed on the recording screen.
5 Take pictures on the camera.
• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• When [Auto Transfer] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi] in the [Setup] menu
cannot be used.
• If the [Bluetooth] and [Auto Transfer] settings of the camera are [ON], the camera automatically
connects to the smartphone via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi when you turn on the camera. Start up the
“Image App” to connect to the camera.
The camera will enter a mode where it can automatically transfer images and [ ] will be
displayed on the recording screen.
• If [ ] is not displayed on the recording screen, images cannot be transferred automatically.
Check the status of the Wi-Fi connections to the smartphone.
∫ To stop the automatic transfer of images
Set [Auto Transfer] to [OFF] on the camera.
• A confirmation screen is displayed, asking you to terminate the Wi-Fi connection.
• If you turn off the camera while sending files, the file transfer will be canceled. In that case, the
camera will resend the files as soon as it is turned on again.
Transferring recorded images to a smartphone automatically
Wireless connectivity required:
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Transfer] > [ON]
• An OS version of Android 7.0 or higher or iOS 10.0 or higher is required to save pictures in
RAW format.
• You cannot automatically transfer the following types of images:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
Wi-FiBluetooth
MENU
265
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
The camera detects the connection between the smartphone and wireless access point
and backs up images stored on the camera to a preset Cloud Storage.
• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible Cloud Storage.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
1 The smartphone automatically connects to the wireless access point.
2 Start up the “Image App” in foreground (a state in which the app can be operated).
3 The camera automatically turns on.
4 The camera automatically connects to the wireless access point connected in step 1.
5 Images on the camera are automatically backed up to a Cloud Storage via "LUMIX
CLUB".
Once the setup procedure below is completed, you can back up data to a cloud
storage service just by performing step 2.
• Refer to the operating instructions of your smartphone for more information on how to set up a
connection automatically in step 1.
∫ Registering a wireless access point to the camera (Setup 1)
• If you have connected the camera to the wireless access point you want to use before, the
procedure below is not required.
1 Select the camera’s menu.
2 Select [New connection].
3 Connect to the wireless access point.
• Refer to the connection methods described on
P286 to connect the camera to the wireless
access point.
Backing up images to a Cloud Storage automatically (Auto Cloud
Backup)
Wireless connectivity required:
A Wireless access point B Cloud Storage
Setting up Auto Cloud Backup
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Wi-Fi network settings]
Wi-FiBluetooth
Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi
LUMIX CLUB
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
266
∫ Setting up “LUMIX CLUB” (Setup 2)
Preparations:
• Create an account for the Cloud Storage you want to use, and have the login information
available.
• Register to “LUMIX CLUB”.
(P282)
1 Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
2 Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service.
• If you are required to register an email address, operate following the on-screen
instructions.
3 Select and register the cloud storage service you want to use in Cloud Storage
Link Settings in Web service link settings.
• Operate following the on-screen instructions.
∫ Setting up “Image App” (Setup 3)
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Operate the smartphone.
• A wireless access point will be registered automatically after the camera connects to it via
Wi-Fi.
• You can register up to 17 wireless access points. If you try to register more than 17 devices,
the wireless access point with the oldest registration history will be replaced.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] will delete registered wireless access points.
1 Select [ ].
2 Select [Bluetooth].
3 Select [ ] for the connected camera.
4 Enable Automatic Backup, and set backup settings.
• Below are the required backup settings.
– Connection information of wireless access point (SSID): Select the wireless access
point registered in (Setup 1).
– Cloud setting: Enter the login ID and password for the “LUMIX CLUB” used in (Setup
2), and select the cloud storage service you want to use in Upload destination.
• You can try a connection test. Turn on the camera and run the test when the camera is
not connected to a Wi-Fi network. If the camera is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
follow steps
1 and 2 of “Terminating the Wi-Fi connection” on P259 to terminate the
Wi-Fi connection of the camera.
267
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Preparations:
• Set the camera to a state in which it can be turned on with the smartphone (standby state).
(P260)
– Camera: [Bluetooth] and [Remote Wakeup] are set to [ON].
– Camera: The Camera On/Off switch is set to [OFF].
• Camera: The card’s Write-Protect switch is not set to [LOCK].
Start up the “Image App” in foreground (a state in which the app can be operated),
and run a backup.
• A backup will start if the smartphone is connected to the wireless access point set up in (Setup
3).
• It may be possible to run a backup even if the app is running in background (a state in which it
cannot be operated).
Running a backup
• The first job backs up all images on the card. The second and subsequent jobs back up only
those that have not been backed up yet.
• If you change the backup destination, images that have already been backed up are not
saved to a new destination.
• A backup job will stop in the following cases:
– When you set the camera on/off switch to [ON]
– When you remove or insert the card
– During USB charging (The job restarts when charging has completed)
– When the battery runs out of power (The job will resume after the battery is recharged.)
• You cannot back up the following types of images:
– Motion pictures
– 6K/4K burst files
– Images recorded with the Post Focus function
– Images recorded with the [High Resolution Mode]
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
268
The smartphone sends its location information to the camera via Bluetooth, and the
camera performs recording while writing the acquired location information.
Preparations:
Enable the GPS function on the smartphone.
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Select the camera’s menu.
• The camera will enter a mode where location information can be recorded and [ ] will
be displayed on the recording screen.
3 Take pictures on the camera.
• Location information will be written to the recorded pictures.
Recording location information to the camera’s images
Wireless connectivity required:
A The smartphone acquires
location information.
B The smartphone sends the
location information.
C The camera performs recording
while writing the location
information.
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Location Logging] > [ON]
When [ ] appears translucent
Location information is not acquired, so data cannot be written. Positioning with the GPS on the
smartphone may not be possible if the smartphone is in a location such as a building or a bag.
Move the smartphone to a location where positioning performance can be optimized, such as
one that offers a wide view of the sky, to try positioning. In addition, refer to the operating
instructions of your smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
• The smartphone drains its battery faster while acquiring location information.
Not available in these cases:
• Location information is not written to motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] format.
Bluetooth
GPS
Bluetooth
MENU
269
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Synchronize the clock and the time zone setting of the camera with those of a
smartphone.
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Select the camera’s menu.
• The [Clock Set] setting and the [Home] or [Destination] setting in [World Time], which are
all located in the [Setup] menu, will be synchronized with the corresponding settings of the
smartphone.
Since saved setup information can be imported to cameras, you can apply the same setup
to more than one camera.
1 Make a Bluetooth connection to the smartphone. (P254)
2 Operate the smartphone.
Synchronizing the camera’s clock with a smartphone
Wireless connectivity required:
> [Setup] > [Bluetooth] > [Auto Clock Set] > [ON]
Saving the camera’s setup information to a smartphone
Wireless connectivity required:
1 Select [ ].
2 Select [ ].
3 Save or load setup information.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
When transferring setup information, the camera automatically makes a Wi-Fi
connection.
• (iOS devices) Depending on the connection status of the smartphone, you may need to
change the connected device on the Wi-Fi setup screen. Follow the on-screen message on
the smartphone to change the setting.
• Setup information can be loaded only to cameras of the same model as this camera.
• You can save or load the setup information of items identical to those in [Save/Restore
Camera Setting] in the [Setup] menu.
Bluetooth
MENU
Wi-FiBluetooth
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
270
Displaying pictures on a TV
You can display pictures on a TV that supports DLNA (DMR).
1
Select the menu.
2
Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P285)
3
Select a device you want to connect.
• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.
4
Play back pictures on this unit.
• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:
(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi].)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Playback on TV]
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]
• If you display pictures using the Wi-Fi function, they cannot be output in 4K resolution.
• When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before
the connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.
• The [Effect] and [Sound] settings for slide shows are not applied to the TV.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures and 6K/4K burst files cannot be played back.
• Images displayed on certain screens of the camera (multi playback screen, etc.) are not
displayed on the TV.
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
MENU
271
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Sending images
When sending images, select the method for sending them
after selecting [New Connection] in [Wi-Fi Function] in [Wi-Fi]
in the [Setup] menu.
∫ Images that can be sent
¢1 Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.
¢2 A motion picture recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent to [PC] if the file size is 4 GB or smaller. It
cannot be sent if the size is greater than 4 GB.
¢3 An OS version of Android 7.0 or higher or iOS 10.0 or higher is required.
¢4 Excluding motion pictures recorded with their size set to [4K] in [Rec Quality]
• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• Refer to the manual of the destination equipment or the web service for more information on
how to playback pictures.
∫ Send Images While Recording
A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.
• While sending a file, [ ] is displayed on the recording screen.
• To terminate the connection, follow the steps below:
• You cannot change the sending settings while sending pictures.
Destination JPEG RAW MP4
¢1
MP4(LPCM) AVCHD
¢1, 2
6K/4K Burst File
¢1
Images recorded with the
Post Focus function
¢1
[Smartphone] ±±
¢3
±
¢4
—— —
[PC] ±± ± ±
¢1
±±
[Cloud Sync. Service] ± — ±
¢4
—— —
[Web service] ± — ±
¢4
—— —
[AV device] ± —— — — —
[Printer]
¢1
± —— — — —
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes]
• Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.
• If you cancel the transmission before its completion by, for example, terminating the Wi-Fi
connection, unsent files will not be resent.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the playback menu while sending.
5
5
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
272
∫ Send Images Stored in the Camera
Images can be selected and sent after recording.
∫ Changing the settings for sending images
Pressing [DISP.] after completing a connection allows you to change the settings for
sending such as the image size for sending.
[Single Select] setting
1 Select the picture.
2 Select [Set].
[Multi Select] setting
1 Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is canceled when the picture is selected
again.
• Pictures are displayed separately by card slot. You can
switch the displayed card by pressing [Fn1].
• You can only select images on one card at a time.
2 Select [OK].
Not available in these cases:
• Images recorded with a device other than the camera and images modified or edited on a PC
may not be sent.
[Size]
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Auto]/[Change] ([L], [M], [S] or [VGA])
• [Auto] is available only for [Web service]. It changes the image size
according to the status of the destination.
[File Format]
(Destination: Only
[Smartphone], [PC])
[JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]
[Delete Location
Data]
(Destination: Only [Cloud
Sync. Service], [Web
service])
Select whether to delete the location information from images before
sending them.
[ON]/[OFF]
• This operation only deletes the location information from the images
that are set to be sent.
[Cloud Limit]
(Destination: Only [Cloud
Sync. Service])
You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs
out of free space.
[ON]: Do not send images.
[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.
6HW
ュリヴヱハ
Fn1
2.
273
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Sending images to a smartphone/tablet
Preparations:
• Install the “Image App” in advance. (P253)
1
Select the menu.
2
Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P285)
3
Select a device you want to connect.
4
Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P272)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] > [Smartphone]
On your smartphone
When connecting with [Via Network]:
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2 Select the wireless access point you want to connect to, and set.
3 Start “Image App”.
When connecting with [WPS Connection] in [Direct]:
1 Start “Image App”.
When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]:
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2 Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit.
3 Start “Image App”.
5
When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures.
(P271)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture.
(P272)
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
274
Printing Wirelessly
You can print pictures on printers that support PictBridge (wireless LAN)
¢
.
¢ Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.
• For details on the PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printer, contact the respective
company.
1
Select the menu.
2
Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P285)
3
Select a printer you want to connect.
4
Select pictures, and then print.
• The procedure for selecting pictures is the same as the one for when the USB
connection cable is connected.
(P307)
• To terminate the connection, press [ ].
(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi].)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Printer]
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
275
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Sending images to AV device
You can send pictures and motion pictures to an AV device (home AV device) that
supports DLNA, such as a recorder.
1
Select the menu.
2
Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P285)
3
Select a device you want to connect.
4
Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P272)
A Wireless access point B Home AV device
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] > [AV device]
5
When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures.
(P271)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P272)
• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may
take a while.
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
276
Sending images to PC
Preparations:
• Turn the computer on.
• Prepare folders for receiving images on the PC.
(P276)
• If the workgroup of the destination PC has been changed from the standard setting, change the
setting of this unit in [PC Connection].
(P291)
∫ To create a folder that receives images
• Create a PC account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to 32 characters)
consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive folder may fail if the
account name includes non-alphanumeric characters.
1 Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to the PC. (P299)
2 Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• To create the folder automatically, select [Auto-create]. To specify a folder, create a new
folder, or set a password to the folder, select [Create manually].
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
(For Windows)
Supported OS: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
Example: Windows 7
1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click.
2 Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.
(For Mac)
Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12
Example: OS X v10.8
1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the
following order.
[File] [Get Info]
2 Enable sharing of the folder.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.
When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
277
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
∫ Sending images to the PC
1 Select the menu.
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P285)
3 Select the PC you want to connect to.
• When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], and enter the
computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Mac).
4 Select the folder you want to send.
5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.].
(P272)
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] > [PC]
6
When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures.
(P271)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P272)
• Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in
those folders.
• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your
PC.
• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Mac) contains a space (blank character), etc., it
may not be recognized.
In that case, we recommend changing the name to one consisting only of 15 or less
alphanumeric characters.
• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the PC may not
be possible.
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
278
Using Web services
You can send pictures and motion pictures to an social media site, etc. via “LUMIX CLUB”.
By setting up automatic transfers of pictures and motion pictures to the Cloud Sync
Service, you can receive the transferred pictures or motion pictures on a PC or
smartphone.
Preparations:
• Register to “LUMIX CLUB”.
(P282)
• To send images to a web service, register the web service. (P279)
A Wireless access point B Web service C Cloud Sync Service
When sending images to web service
• Images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera.
• If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address
registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.
• Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as
a title, the time and date when the images was taken, and the location where the image
was taken. Check this information before uploading images to web services.
• Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc. of
images uploaded on web services.
• When uploading images to the web service, do not delete images from this camera, even
after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly
uploaded to the web service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting
from the deletion of images stored in this unit.
LUMIX CLUB
279
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible web services.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/
Preparation:
Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use, and
have the login information available.
1 Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
2 Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service.
3 If your email address has not been registered to the “LUMIX CLUB” yet, register
it.
4 Select and register the cloud storage service you want to use in Web service
link settings.
• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.
1 Select the menu.
2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P285)
3 Select a web service.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.].
(P272)
Registering web services
Sending images
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] > [Web service]
5
When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures.
(P271)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture.
(P272)
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
280
∫ Sending images in the camera to a web service with simple operations
1 Display an image.
2 Press 4.
(When group pictures are selected, press 3, and select
[Upload(Wi-Fi)] or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)].)
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].
(When group pictures are selected, select [Upload(Wi-Fi)]
or [Upload All(Wi-Fi)] after touch [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ], and then touch [ ].)
• If a screen is displayed asking you to select the connection method:
(P286)
• If a screen is displayed asking yo to acquire a new login ID: (P282)
3 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
4 Select a web service.
5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P272)
•Step
4, 5 are not necessary when you continue to send another image.
• To terminate the connection, press [MENU/SET] or operate other controls to exit the
playback screen. You can also terminate the connection by pressing [Wi-Fi].
(P252)
To change the settings for sending images or web service
Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and follow step
1 and onwards again.
• You can also change the send settings by pressing [Wi-Fi] while using a Wi-Fi connection.
(P252)
• When group pictures are displayed continuously, all pictures in the group will be sent. When
group pictures are displayed one by one, the currently displayed picture will be sent.
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
SUB
MENU
281
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
∫ Using [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of November 2017)
You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB”
(P282) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to
send a picture to a Cloud Folder.
For a PC, use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to set up Cloud Sync settings. For a smartphone, use
“Image App” to set them up.
1 Select the menu.
2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P285)
3 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P272)
When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]
• Sent images are temporarily saved in the cloud folder so that they can be synchronized with
your device, such as a PC or a smartphone.
• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1000 pictures). Transferred
images are deleted 30 days after the transfer. Furthermore, when the number of stored
images exceeds 1000, some images may be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit]
(P272)
setting even within 30 days after the transfer.
• When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is complete,
images may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after the transfer.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] or [Send Images Stored in the
Camera] > [Cloud Sync. Service]
4
When [Send Images While Recording] has been selected
Take pictures.
(P271)
When [Send Images Stored in the Camera] has been selected
Select the picture. (P272)
Not available in these cases:
• When [Auto Transfer] in [Bluetooth] is set to [ON], [Wi-Fi Function] is not available.
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
282
Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).
1 Select the menu.
• Connect to the network.
Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
2 Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set. (P286)
• Except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to the previously-used
wireless access point. To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].
• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
3 Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree].
• Switch pages: 3/4
• Enlarge the display: (reset the enlarged display: )
• Move the position of the enlarged display: 3/4/2/1
• Cancel without registering information: [ ]
4 Enter a password.
• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
5 Check the login ID and select [OK].
• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.
• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically.
When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the
numbers.
About the [LUMIX CLUB]
Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.
https://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Please note:
• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected troubles, and
the service contents may be changed or added, without prior notice to the users.
• The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance notice.
Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] > [Set/Add
Account] > [New account]
MENU
283
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
Preparation:
When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.
To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB”
website from your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in
advance.
1 Select the menu.
• The login ID and password are displayed.
• The password is displayed as “ ”.
2 Select the item to change.
3 Enter the login ID or password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to P64.
• Enter the new password you have created on your smartphone or PC into the camera.
4 Select [Exit].
Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending
images on this unit to other devices or web services.
∫ When either this unit or the smartphone has acquired the login ID:
1 Connect this unit to the smartphone. (P253)
2 From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID.
• A screen for setting a common login ID may be displayed after the camera and the smartphone
are connected.
∫ When this unit and the smartphone have acquired different login IDs:
Change the login ID and password of either device.
• To change the camera’s login ID and password:
(P283)
Checking or changing the login ID or password ([Set Login ID])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] > [Set/Add
Account] > [Set Login ID]
To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
284
Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.
Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.
You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.
• Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the
camera.
1 Select the menu.
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
2 Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen.
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
3 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB”
account.
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID.
4 Select [OK].
Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] >
[Terms of use]
Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB] > [Delete
account]
MENU
MENU
285
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
About Wi-Fi connections
When you use [New Connection], select the connection
method to set up a connection.
On the other hand, when you use [Select a destination from
History] or [Select a destination from Favorite], the camera
connects to the selected device with the previously-used
settings.
When a screen similar to the one below is displayed, select a connection method.
Wireless access point
[Via Network] Connects via a wireless access point. P286
[Direct] Your device connects directly to this unit. P288
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
286
• When [Via Network] is selected, except for the first-time connection, the camera will connect to
the previously-used wireless access point. To change the connection destination, press [DISP.].
• WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure the settings related to the
connection and security of wireless LAN devices.
For details about the compatibility and operation of the function, refer to the operating
instructions for the wireless access point.
Connecting via a wireless access point (via the network)
[WPS (Push-Button)]
Press the WPS button on the wireless access point to set up a
connection.
Press the wireless access point
WPS button until it switches to WPS
mode.
e.g.:
[WPS (PIN code)]
Enter a PIN code into the wireless access point to set up a
connection.
1 On the camera screen, select the wireless access
point you are connecting to.
2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen
into the wireless access point.
3 Press [MENU/SET] of the camera.
[From List]
Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS
compatibility, or when you want to search for and connect to a
wireless access point.
(P287)
287
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
• Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network authentication is
encrypted.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting
to.
• To search for wireless access points again, press [DISP.].
• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When
connecting with [Manual Input]” on
P287.
2 (If network authentication is encrypted)
Enter the encryption key.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• Except for the first-time connection, a connection will be made automatically using the
previously-used encryption key.
∫ When connecting with [Manual Input]
• When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, authentication type, encryption type,
encryption key of the wireless access point you are using.
1 On the screen displayed in step
1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility
(connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input].
2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select [Set].
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
3 Select the network authentication type.
4 (When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected) Enter the encryption key.
If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility (connecting by [From List])
[WPA2-PSK]
Supported encryption methods: [TKIP], [AES]
[WPA2/WPA-PSK]
[No Encryption] —
• Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless
access point.
• If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too
weak.
Refer to “Message Display”
(P321) and “Troubleshooting” (P323) for details.
• Depending on your environment, transmission speed between the camera and wireless
access point may decrease. In addition, the wireless access point may not be available for
use.
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
288
Connecting the camera and another device directly (direct connection)
[WPS Connection]
[WPS (Push-Button)]
1 On the camera, select [WPS (Push-Button)].
2 Set the device to WPS mode.
• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing [DISP.] on this
unit.
[WPS (PIN code)]
1 On the camera, select [WPS (PIN code)].
2 Enter the PIN code of the device into this camera.
[Manual Connection]
Enter the SSID and password into
the device. The SSID and
password are displayed on the
connection waiting screen of this
unit.
• If the destination is set to
[Smartphone], the password is not
displayed. Select the SSID to
establish a connection.
(P256)
• Please also refer to the operating instructions of the device to be connected.
289
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
When the Wi-Fi function is used, a record is saved in the history. You can register records
as favorites. Using the history or favorites list, you can easily connect with the same
settings as used previously.
• If the settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be possible to connect
to the device.
1 Select the menu.
2 Select item.
• You can display details of the connection by pressing [DISP.].
∫ Registering records as favorites
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the history you want to register to favorites, and then press 1.
3 Enter a registration name.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones
([Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite])
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]
[Select a destination from
History]
Connects with the same settings as the previous ones.
[Select a destination from
Favorite]
Connects with settings registered as favorites.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[Select a destination from History]
MENU
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
290
∫ Editing the items registered to favorites
1 Select the menu.
2 Select the favorite history you want to edit, and then press 1.
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] >
[Select a destination from Favorite]
[Remove from Favorite] —
[Change the Order in
Favorite]
Specify the destination location of the desired item to change
the display order.
[Change the Registered
Name]
Enter text to change the registered name.
• Because the number of records that can be saved is limited, register frequently-used
connection settings as favorites.
• Performing [Reset Network Settings] clears the history and the contents saved in [Select a
destination from Favorite].
• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is connected to a wireless access point
other than the camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera using [Direct]. Change
the Wi-Fi settings of the device you want to connect to so that the access point to be used is
set to the camera.
You can also select [New Connection] and reconnect the devices.
(P253)
• A connection may not be established easily when you try to connect to a network to which
many PCs are connected.
If a connection attempt fails, reconnect by using [New Connection].
MENU
291
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu
Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Sets either the camera or the smartphone as the priority control device to be used during
remote recording.
(P262)
You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct connection to a
smartphone.
• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by scanning a QR code.
Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.
(P282)
You can set the workgroup.
To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as the destination PC is
required.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
1 Press [MENU/SET].
2 Enter the workgroup of the connecting PC.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• To reset to the default setting, press [DISP.].
> [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup]
[Priority of Remote Device]
[Wi-Fi Password]
[ON] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and password. (P257)
[OFF] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID. (P256)
[LUMIX CLUB]
[PC Connection]
MENU
10. Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function
292
You can change the name (SSID) of this unit.
1 Press [DISP.].
2 Enter the desired device name.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
To prevent incorrect operation and use of the Wi-Fi function by a third party and to protect
saved personal information, protect the Wi-Fi function with a password.
• Once a password is set, you are required to enter it each time you use the Wi-Fi function.
• If you forget the password, you can reset it with [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu.
Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
• A MAC Address is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment.
• IP address refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the Internet.
Usually, the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function such as a
wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)
Displays the certification number for radio regulations.
[Device Name]
[Wi-Fi Function Lock]
[Setup]
Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
• For information on how to enter characters, refer to
P64.
[Cancel] Cancel the password.
[Network Address]
[Approved Regulations]
293
11. Connecting to other equipment
Watching/Saving 4K Motion Pictures on an
External Device
∫ Playing Back on a TV Screen
Preparation:
Set [HDMI Mode (Play)]
(P227) to [AUTO] or a resolution of [4K].
• When connecting to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture,
select [AUTO].
Connect the camera and a 4K-compatible TV with an HDMI cable, and
display the playback screen.
(P294)
• Even though the output resolution will be lower, you can also play them back by connecting the
camera to a TV that does not support motion pictures in 4K.
• You can also play back 4K motion pictures recorded with [Rec Format]
set to [MP4] (except for those recorded with [Rec Quality] set to [4K/
150M/60p]) on a Panasonic TV with SD card slots that supports 4K
motion picture by inserting the card into the TV.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
∫ Watching on a PC
To play back 4K motion pictures on a PC, use the software
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• To play back and edit motion pictures in 4K, you need a high-performance PC
environment.
• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
You cannot dub 4K motion pictures to Blu-ray discs and DVDs with Panasonic recorders.
∫ Storing on a PC
Use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to import 4K motion pictures to a PC.
• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).
Watching motion pictures in 4K
Storing 4K motion pictures
11. Connecting to other equipment
294
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen
Preparations: Turn this unit and the TV off.
1
Connect the camera and the TV with an HDMI cable.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
2
Turn on the TV and select the input to match the connector in use.
3
Turn the camera on and then press [(].
A [HDMI] socket (Type A)
B HDMI cable
C HDMI socket (on the TV)
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
• Check the [HDMI Mode (Play)].
(P227)
• No picture is displayed on the screen of this unit.
• If the ambient temperature is high or a signal is continuously output via HDMI, after [ ] is
displayed, the HDMI signal output may stop to protect the camera. Wait until the camera cools
down.
• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the
left and right of the pictures.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.
• HDMI output will be canceled if a USB connection cable (supplied) is connected
simultaneously.
• No sound is output from the camera speakers.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
HDMI
295
11. Connecting to other equipment
When using the HDMI output, you can record pictures and
motion pictures while monitoring the camera image on an
external monitor, TV or similar device.
∫ Notes on images output via HDMI (sorted by Recording Mode)
• When [Rec Area] is set to [ ] in a mode except Creative Video Mode, the output setting of
aspect ratio, size, and frame rate are determined by the [Rec Quality] setting in the [Motion
Picture] menu.
• When recording motion pictures, the output method changes to a setup equivalent to the one
used in Creative Video Mode.
• It may take some time for the output method to change.
The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card
slot
• Depending on the TV model, pictures may not be displayed on the full screen.
• The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the TV
model.
• For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Recording while monitoring camera images
Recording
Mode
Aspect ratio Images are output in 16:9 format.
The output setting is determined by the
[Aspect Ratio] setting in the [Rec]
menu.
• Black bars appear on both sides of
images, except for those with an
aspect ratio of [16:9].
Size/frame
rate
The output setting is determined by the
[Rec Quality] setting in the [Motion
Picture] menu.
The output setting is determined by the
connected device.
11. Connecting to other equipment
296
∫ Switching the information displayed
You can change the display shown during HDMI output using [HDMI Info Display (Rec)] in
[TV Connection] on the [Setup] menu.
[ON]:
The camera display is output as is.
[OFF]:
Only images are output.
• When you use the HDMI output during recording, the image may be displayed with a time lag.
• Electronic sounds and electronic shutter sounds are muted.
• When you check the image and sound from the TV connected to the camera, the microphone
of the camera may pick up the sound from the speakers of the TV, producing an abnormal
sound (audio feedback). If this occurs, move the camera away from the TV or lower the
volume on the TV.
• Certain setting screens are not output via HDMI.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording 6K/4K photos
– When recording with the Post Focus function
297
11. Connecting to other equipment
Preparations:
1 Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable
(P294).
2 Turn the camera on and then press [(].
3 Operate with the remote control for the TV.
Turning this unit off:
If you use the remote control for the TV to turn the TV off, this unit is also turned off.
Automatic input switching:
• If you connect with an HDMI cable and then turn this unit on, and then press [(], the input
channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in standby
status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on link]
setting).
Using VIERA Link (HDMI)
What is the VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)?
• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations
when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI cable
for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the
standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not
guaranteed. When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with
VIERA Link, refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices.
• This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional VIERA Link equipment.
> [Setup] > [TV Connection] > [VIERA Link] > [ON]
• Operation using the buttons on this unit will be limited.
• To play back the sound of a film during a slide show, set [Sound] to [AUTO] or [Audio] on the
Slide Show setting screen.
• Use a “High Speed HDMI cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI cable” (Type A–Type A plug, up to 1.5 m (4.9 feet) long)
MENU
11. Connecting to other equipment
298
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on
your PC
You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC.
• Some PCs can read directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of your PC.
∫ PC that can be used
The unit can be connected to any PC capable of recognizing a mass storage device.
• Windows support: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
• Mac support: OS X v10.5 to v10.11, macOS 10.12
AVCHD motion pictures may not be imported correctly when copied as files or
folder
• When using Windows, import AVCHD motion pictures with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• With a Mac, AVCHD motion pictures can be imported using “iMovie”.
Please note that importing is not possible depending on the picture quality.
(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)
299
11. Connecting to other equipment
• To download the software, you need to connect the PC to the Internet.
• It may take some time to download the software depending on the communication
environment.
• Supported OSs are current as of November 2017 and are subject to change.
This software allows you to manage images. For example, you can send pictures and
motion pictures to a PC and sort them by recording date or model name. You can also
perform operations such as writing images to a DVD, processing and correcting images,
and editing motion pictures.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
Download the software while it is available for download.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs10pe.html
(This Site is English only.)
• Download expiration: January 2023
• Operating environment
• When using the playback and editing functions for 4K motion pictures or the picture cropping
function for 6K/4K photos, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF
file) for details.
• “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” is not compatible with Mac.
Downloading software
PHOTOfunSTUDIO 10.0 PE
OS
Windows
®
7 (32bit/64bit) SP1,
Windows
®
8.1 (32bit/64bit),
Windows
®
10 (32bit/64bit)
• For 4K motion pictures and 6K/4K photos, a 64 bit OS version of
Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10 is required.
CPU Pentium
®
4 (2.8 GHz or higher)
Display 1024k768 pixels or more (1920k1080 pixels or more recommended)
RAM 1 GB or more (32bit), 2 GB or more (64bit)
Free hard disk
space
450 MB or more for installing software
11. Connecting to other equipment
300
This is software to edit RAW format images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be displayed on a
personal computer.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/
• Operating environment
• For details on how to use the “SILKYPIX Developer Studio”, refer to the Help or the Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory’s support website.
This software allows you to edit motion pictures with ease.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
http://loilo.tv/product/20
• Only the trial version can be installed.
• For more information on how to use LoiLoScope, read the LoiLoScope manual available for
download at the site.
• “LoiLoScope” is not compatible with Mac.
SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE
OS
Windows
Windows
®
7,
Windows
®
8,
Windows
®
8.1,
Windows
®
10
Mac OS X v10.6 to v10.11, macOS 10.12
LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version
(Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10)
301
11. Connecting to other equipment
Preparations:
Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to the PC. (P299)
1 Connect the computer and camera with the USB connection cable (supplied).
• Please turn on this unit and your PC before connecting.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or
in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
A [USB/CHARGE] socket
B USB connection cable (supplied)
2 Press 3/4 to select [PC(Storage)], and then press [MENU/SET].
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Storage)] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be
automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.
3 Copy the images to a PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• Do not delete or move copied files or folders in Windows Explorer.
When viewing in “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, you will not be able to play back or edit.
Transferring images to a PC
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional). If the remaining
battery power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating, the alarm
beeps.
Disconnect the USB connection cable safely. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
11. Connecting to other equipment
302
∫ Copying to a PC without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (For Mac)
Even if you are using a Mac, or in any situation where “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” cannot be
installed, you can still copy files and folders by connecting the camera to the computer and
then dragging and dropping them to it.
• The content (folder structure) on the card of this unit is as follows.
For Windows: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed in [Computer]
For Mac: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed on the desktop
•Card
CAMSET: The camera’s setup
information
DCIM: Images
1 Folder number
2 Color space P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
3 File number
4 JPG: Still pictures
MP4: [MP4] Motion pictures
RW2: Pictures in RAW files
AVCHD: [AVCHD] Motion pictures
AVCHD
DCIM
100XXXXX
101XXXXX
999XXXXX
PXXX0001.JPG
PXXX0999.JPG
PRIVATE
CAMSET
AD_LUMIX
303
11. Connecting to other equipment
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a
Recorder
If you insert card holding content recorded with this unit into a
Panasonic recorder, you can dub the content to a Blu-ray Disc or
DVD etc.
Methods to export still pictures and motion pictures to other
devices will vary depending on the file format. (JPEG, RAW,
AVCHD or MP4).
• 6K/4K burst files (MP4 format) are not supported by Panasonic recorders.
Dubbing can be performed when the camera and a
Panasonic recorder with a USB socket are connected
with a USB connection cable.
• Use the card slot 1.
• See the operating instructions for the recorder about the details about copying and playing
back.
11. Connecting to other equipment
304
Controlling the Camera from a PC
By selecting [PC(Tether)] and connecting the camera to a PC, you can control the camera
from supported software.
∫ Downloading software
This software is used to control a Panasonic digital camera from a PC. It allows you to
change various settings of the camera, perform remote recording, and save remotely
recorded images to the PC.
Check the site below to download and install the software.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_lumixtether.html
• Operating environment
• Supported OSs are current as of November 2017 and are subject to change.
• For details on how to use the “ LUMIX Tether ”, refer to the operation guide of “LUMIX Tether”
(PDF file).
• To download the software, you need to connect the PC to the Internet.
• It may take some time to download the software depending on the communication
environment.
“LUMIX Tether ”
OS
Windows Windows
®
7, Windows
®
8.1, Windows
®
10
Mac OS X v10.10 to v10.11, macOS 10.12
Interface USB port (Super Speed USB (USB 3.0))
305
11. Connecting to other equipment
∫ Operating the camera from a PC
Preparations:
Install “LUMIX Tether ” to the PC.
1 Connect the computer and camera with the USB connection cable (supplied).
• Please turn on this unit and your PC before connecting.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely or
in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
A [USB/CHARGE] socket
B USB connection cable (supplied)
2 Press 3/4 to select [PC(Tether)], and then press [MENU/SET].
• If [USB Mode] is set to [PC(Tether)] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be
automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.
3 Use “LUMIX Tether” to operate the camera from the PC.
• When the camera is connected to the PC via [PC(Tether)]:
– The camera will be set to Recording Mode.
– Wi-Fi/Bluetooth function cannot be used.
– [ ] is displayed on the screen.
– Instead of the number of recordable pictures, [PC] will appear on the screen if you perform
recording without inserting a card into the camera.
– The HDMI cable can be connected to the camera at the same time.
11. Connecting to other equipment
306
Printing the Pictures
If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge, you can select the pictures to
be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera’s monitor.
• Group pictures will not be displayed as group pictures but as single pictures.
• Some printers can print directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to
the operating instructions of your printer.
Preparations:
Turn on the camera and the printer.
Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the pictures.
1
Press [(] on the camera.
2
Rotate the rear dial to the left to display the multi playback screen,
and press [Fn1] to select the card to display the images you want to
print.
• You can only print images on one card at a time. You cannot change the displayed card
while a printer is connected.
• You can also select the card to be displayed using the function button [Slot Change]
(P62).
3
Connect the printer and camera with the USB connection cable
(supplied).
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one.
A [USB/CHARGE] socket
B USB connection cable (supplied)
4
Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then press [MENU/SET].
307
11. Connecting to other equipment
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Press 3 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/
SET].
1 Press 3.
2 Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/SET].
• If a connection to the printer cannot be made, set [USB Power Supply] in the [Setup] menu to
[OFF] and try reconnecting to the printer.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional). If the remaining
battery power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the alarm beeps.
If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If not printing, disconnect the USB
connection cable.
• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [å] (Cable disconnect prohibit icon) is
displayed.
(May not be displayed depending on the type of printer used.)
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off, and disconnect the USB connection
cable.
Not available in these cases:
• Motion pictures, 6K/4K burst files, and images recorded with the Post Focus function cannot
be printed.
Selecting a single picture and printing it
Selecting multiple pictures and printing them
[Multi Select]
Multiple pictures are printed at one time.
•Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures and then press [MENU/
SET].
(Press [MENU/SET] again to cancel the setting.)
• After the pictures have been selected, press [DISP.].
[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.
[Rating] Prints all images with [Rating] levels between [¿1] and [¿5].
PictBridgePictBridge
0XOWL3ULQW
3ULQW
11. Connecting to other equipment
308
∫ Print Settings
Select and set the items both on the screen in step
2 of the “Selecting a single picture and
printing it” and in step
3 of the “Selecting multiple pictures and printing them” procedures.
• When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is not supported by the
camera, set [Paper Size] or [Page Layout] to [{] and then set the paper size or the layout on
the printer.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.)
• If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.
• Depending on the printer, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if
this is the case.
[Print with Date] Sets date printing.
[Num.of prints] Sets the number of pictures to be printed (up to 999 pictures).
[Paper Size] Sets the paper size.
[Page Layout]
Sets whether or not to add borders and how many pictures to be
printed on each sheet of paper.
• The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [¥] indication lights
yellow during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the
printer.
• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed several times. In this case, the
remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.
• Only pictures taken in JPEG format can be printed. Those taken in RAW will use the JPEG
pictures that were simultaneously created. If an equivalent JPEG picture is not available, no
print will take place.
309
12. Others
Optional accessories
Using a battery grip (DMW-BGG9: optional) improves ease of
operation and grip when held vertically. Installing a spare battery will
allow you to record for a longer time.
∫ Setting a priority for the use of spare batteries
Preparations:
• Turn this unit off, and then remove the terminal cover.
1 Attach the battery grip to this unit, and then turn this unit on.
2 Select the menu.
Battery Grip (optional)
> [Setup] > [Battery Use Priority]
[BODY]: The battery in this unit is used first.
[BG]: The battery in the battery grip is used first.
• When the battery in the battery grip is used, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• If the terminal cover is hard to remove, flip the cover’s corner by the camera’s recess toward
the center.
• Read the operating instructions of the battery grip for details.
MENU
12. Others
310
If you use the shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional), you
can avoid jitter (camera shake) when using a tripod and you can
keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with [B] (Bulb) or
Burst Mode. The shutter remote control works similar to the shutter
button on the camera.
Shutter Remote Control (optional)
• Always use a genuine Panasonic shutter remote control (DMW-RSL1: optional).
• Record with Creative Video Mode when using for motion picture recording. Motion picture
recording can be started/stopped with the shutter remote control.
• Read the operating instructions of the shutter remote control for details.
Not available in these cases:
• You cannot use the shutter remote control for the following operation.
– Canceling [Sleep Mode], [Sleep Mode(Wi-Fi)] or [Power Save LVF Shooting]
311
12. Others
Using a stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional) or stereo microphone
(VW-VMS10: optional), you can record sounds with quality superior to those recorded with
the built-in microphone.
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
A Hot shoe
B [MIC] socket
C Stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2: optional)
Stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional)
• Do not use the stereo microphone cables with the length of 3 m (9.8 feet) or more.
Preparations:
• Turn this unit off.
• When attaching the stereo shotgun microphone to the camera, remove the hot shoe cover.
(P155)
∫ Setting the range within which the stereo shotgun microphone (DMW-MS2:
optional) will record sounds
1 Attach the dedicated stereo shotgun microphone to this unit, and then turn this
unit on.
2 Select the menu.
• This item is available only when using a stereo shotgun microphone.
3 (When [MANUAL] is selected)
Press 2/1 to select a range, and press [MENU/SET].
External Microphone (optional)
> [Motion Picture] > [Special Mic.]
[STEREO]
Allows stereo recording of sound over a wide area.
[LENS AUTO]
Allows recording within the range that is set automatically according
to the angle of view of the lens.
[SHOTGUN]
Allows recording from one direction by shutting out background and
surrounding noise.
[S.SHOTGUN]
Allows recording within the range even narrower than that of
[SHOTGUN].
[MANUAL] Allows recording within the range you set manually.
MENU
12. Others
312
∫ Reducing the wind noise when using an external microphone
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]
• This item is available only when using an external microphone.
• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.
By using the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler (optional), you can record and play
back without worrying about the remaining battery charge.
The optional DC coupler can only be used with the designated Panasonic AC adaptor
(optional).
> [Motion Picture] > [Wind Cut]
• While the external microphone is connected, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
• When the external microphone is connected, [Mic Level Disp.] is automatically set to [ON],
and the mic level is displayed on the screen.
• When an external microphone is attached to the camera, do not hold only the external
microphone to prevent the camera from falling.
• If the noises are recorded when you use an AC adaptor (optional), use a battery.
• When a stereo microphone (VW-VMS10: optional) is used, [Special Mic.] is fixed to
[STEREO].
• When [Special Mic.] is set to [LENS AUTO], [S.SHOTGUN] or [MANUAL], [Sound Output] in
the [Motion Picture] menu is fixed to [REC SOUND].
• If you press the function button to which [Mic. Directivity Adjust] in [Fn Button Set] in the
[Custom] ([Operation]) menu is assigned when [Special Mic.] is set to [MANUAL], the screen
that lets you set the range will be displayed.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the external microphone.
AC adaptor (optional)/DC coupler (optional)
• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).
• When using an AC adaptor (optional), use the AC cable supplied with the AC adaptor.
• When the DC coupler is being mounted, the DC coupler cover opens, so the structure
ceases to be dust-proof and splash-proof.
Be careful not to allow sand, dust and water etc. to adhere to or enter the structure. After use,
check that there is no foreign matter attached to the coupler cover, and close it firmly.
• Also read the operating instructions for the AC adaptor (optional) and DC coupler.
MENU
313
12. Others
Monitor Display/Viewfinder Display
• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [ ] (monitor
style) in the monitor.
In recording
98
98
98
2
00
00
2
00
2
00
60
60
602.8
2.8
2.8
AFS
AFS
AFS
BKT
BKT
BKT
L
4:3
0
0
BKT
BKT
BKT
AEL
AEL
AEL
BKT
BKT
BKT
AWB
AWB
AWB
ラュン
ラュン
BKT
BKT
BKT
60
p
×
×
MINI
MINI
MINIMINI
ISO
ISO
SS
SS
SS
F
F
Fn10
Fn10
Fn10Fn10
Fn7
Fn7
Fn7Fn7
Fn6
Fn6
Fn6Fn6
Fn8
Fn8
Fn8Fn8
Fn9
Fn9
Fn9Fn9
OFF
OFF
OFFOFF
1
Recording Mode (P43)
Custom settings (P85)
Photo Style (P188)
‰Œ
Flash Mode (P158)
Flash (P159, 162)
Extended Tele Conversion
(when recording motion
pictures)
(P150)
Recording format/Recording
quality
(P166)
Picture size/Aspect Ratio
(P185)
Extended Tele Conversion
(when taking still pictures)
(P150)
Image effect (filter) adjustment
display
(P82, 190)
Image effect (filter) setting
(P190)
Card (displayed only during
recording)
(P29)
P
C1
EXPS
EXPS
WL
60
p
60
p
L
4:3
EXM
4:3
EXPS
No card
The card is full
Elapsed recording time
¢1
(P164)
Simultaneous recording
indicator
(P168)
Automatic viewfinder/monitor
switching
(P41)
Peaking (P213)
Highlight Shadow (P192)
HDR (P201)/iHDR (P68)
Multi exposure (P202)
Digital Zoom (P152)
High-Res Mode (P196)
Electronic shutter (P199)
High speed video (P173)
Picture-taking during motion
picture recording (Photo
Priority)
(P168)
Overheat indicator (P323)
8
m
30
s
ラュン
180fps
12. Others
314
2
A ›
Quality (P187)
Focus Mode (P89, 103)
Focus Bracket (P143)
Post Focus (P130)
š
Ø
AF Mode (P92)
Face Recognition (P217)
AF Lock (P106)
Burst (P115)
6K/4K Photo (P119)
Self-timer (P135)
Battery indication (P22)
Power is being supplied (P26)
Battery Grip (P309)
Image Stabilizer (P145)
Jitter alert (P146)
Recording state (Flashes red.)/
Focus (Lights green.)
(P42)
Focus (Under low illumination)
(P87)
Focus (Starlight AF) (P87)
Pre-Burst (P115)
Connected to Wi-Fi
Connected to Bluetooth (P256)
Location Logging (P268)
Histogram (P213)
AFS
AFF AFC MF
AFS
BKT
A
F
L
SH2
LOW
STAR
PRE
3
Name
¢2
(P219)
Number of days that have passed since the
departure date
¢3
(P221)
Age
¢2
(P219)
Location
¢3
(P221)
Current date and time/Travel destination setting
¢3
:
“
(P221)
Exposure meter (P215)
Focal distance display (P153)
Step zoom (P153)
Time Stamp Recording (P170)
4
AF area (P97)
Spot metering target (P192)
Center marker display (P214)
Self-timer (P135)
Mic level display (P169)
Mic Level Limiter (OFF) (P169)
Silent Mode (P198)
External Microphone (P311)
AE Lock (P106)
Metering Mode (P54, 192)
Program Shift (P72)
2.8
Aperture value (P42)
Aperture Bracket (P143)
60
Shutter speed (P42)
Exposure compensation value
(P107)
Exposure Bracket (P142)
Brightness (P69, 84)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P75)
ISO sensitivity (P109)
LMT
OFF
A
E
L
AE
2.8
BKT
BKT
315
12. Others
¢1 m: minute, s: second
¢2 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup]
setting is set.
¢3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock
and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.
5
White Balance Bracket, White
Balance Bracket (Color
Temperature)
(P144)
White Balance Fine Adjustment
(P113)
VÐî
Ñ
White Balance (P111)
Color (P69)
98
Number of recordable pictures
(P31)
r20
Maximum number of pictures
that can be taken continuously
(P117)
Available recording time
¢1
(P31)
Relay recording (P229)
Backup recording (P229)
Allocation recording (P229)
BKT
AWB
A
WBc
1
1
8
m
30
s
6
Touch tab
(P211)
Touch zoom (P154)
Touch Shutter (P53)
Touch AE (P54)
Peaking (P213)
Function button (P61)
/
/
(P172)
Color (P69)
Defocus control function
(P69, 84)
Brightness (P69, 84)
Type of defocus ([Miniature
Effect])
(P81)
One point color (P81)
Position of the light source
(P82)
Image effect (filter)
adjustment
(P84, 190)
Image effect ON/OFF (P190)
Image effect (filter) (P190)
Aperture value (P42)
Shutter speed (P42)
ISO sensitivity (P109)
Microphone level adjustment
(P169)
××
AE
Fn6
MINIMINI
F
SS
ISO
12. Others
316
On-monitor recording information
In recording
1
Recording Mode (P43)
F2.8
Aperture value (P42)
1/60
Shutter speed (P42)
Battery indication (P22)
Power is being supplied (P26)
Card (displayed only during
recording)
(P29)
2
ISO sensitivity (P109)
Exposure compensation value
(P107)
Brightness (P69)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P75)
‰Œ
Flash Mode (P158)
Flash (P159, 161)
F 2.8
98
98
AWB
1/60
0 0
0
Fn
ISO
AUTO
OFF
L
4:3
AFS
AFS
C1
EXPSEXPS
ISO
AUTO
0
0
WL
3
Single (P114)
Burst (P115)
6K/4K Photo (P119)
Post Focus (P130)
Self-timer (P135)
High-Res Mode (P196)
Focus Mode (P89, 103)
š
Ø
AF Mode (P92)
A ›
Quality (P187)
Picture size/Aspect Ratio
(P186)
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (P250)
Function button setting (P60)
4
Photo Style (P188)
VÐ
îÑ
White Balance (P111)
Intelligent Dynamic Range
Control
(P193)
Metering Mode (P192)
Relay recording (P229)
Backup recording (P229)
Allocation recording (P229)
98
Number of recordable pictures
(P31)
r20
Maximum number of pictures
that can be taken continuously
(P117)
Available recording time (P31)
----
No card
SH2
AFS
AFF
AFC
MF
L
4:3
Fn
AWB
AWBc
1
1
AE
r
8
m
30
s
317
12. Others
In playback
1
Playback Mode (P235)
Protected picture (P236)
Location Logging (P268)
Ü3
Rating (P236)
å
Cable disconnect prohibit icon
(P307)
Motion picture playback (P177)
Save pictures from the 6K/4K burst
file
(P125)
Create pictures from an image
recorded with the Post Focus
function
(P132)
Continuous group picture playback
(P182)
Focus Bracket (P143, 181)
‘
Stamped with text indication (P243)
Elapsed playback time
¢1
(P177)
2
Icon indicating the presence of a
marker
(P127)
6K/4K Photo (6K/4K burst file) (P119)
Post Focus (P130)
Focus Stacking (P133)
High-Res Mode (P196)
Picture size/Aspect Ratio (P186)
Recording format/Recording quality
(P166)
60
60
60
0
0
AWB
AWB
AWB
1/98
1/98
1/98
2
00
00
2
00
2
00
L
4:3
3
3
SLF
SLFSLF
SLF
F2.8
F2.8
F2.8
8
m
30
s
L
4:3
60
p
High speed video (P173)
A ›
Quality (P187)
Battery indication (P22)
Power is being supplied (P26)
Battery Grip (P309)
Card slot (P29)
1/98
Picture number/Total pictures
Connected to Wi-Fi
Number of group pictures
Motion picture recording time
¢1
(P177)
3
Clear Retouch completed icon
(P242)
Currently retrieving information icon
Playback (Motion Pictures) (P177)
Upload (Wi-Fi) (P280)
Group Display (P182)
Sub Menu (P280)
Silent Mode (P198)
Number of days that have passed
since the departure date
(P221)
Multi Playback (P180)
Delete (P183)
4
Name
¢2
(P217, 219)
Location
¢2
(P221)
Title
¢2
(P237)
Age (P217, 219)
5
Recording information
Time Stamp Recording
(P170)
180fps
SLF
8
m
30
s
SUB
MENU
67'$<
12. Others
318
¢1 m: minute, s: second
¢2 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face
Recog.]).
In playback
Detailed information display Histogram display
Photo style, Highlight shadow display White balance display
Lens information display
s
RGB
1/5
AFS
200
L
4:3
100-0001
5500
0
STD.
ISOISO
0
60
F2.8
10:00 DEC. 1.2018
1
2/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
60
R
Y
B
G
F2.8
10:00 DEC. 1.2018
3/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
60
F2.8
10:00 DEC. 1.2018
4/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
60
F2.8
10:00 DEC. 1.2018
5500K
1
G
M
AB
5/5
200
100-0001
ISOISO
0
60
F2.8
10:00 DEC. 1.2018
1
Recording information (basic)
2
Recorded date and time/World Time
(P220)
3
Card slot (P29)
100-0001
Folder/File number (P302)
4
Recording information (advanced)
5500
White Balance Color Temperature
(P112)
Intelligent Dynamic Range Control
(P193)
HDR (P201)/iHDR (P68)
Intelligent Resolution (P193)
319
12. Others
Status LCD Indications
The camera’s recording information is displayed.
*All pieces of information are shown here for explanatory purposes.
In recording
1
White Balance (P111)
2
Metering Mode (P192)
3
Aperture value (P42)
4
ISO sensitivity (P109)
5
Shutter speed (P42)
6
Number of recordable pictures (P31)/
Maximum number of pictures that can be taken
continuously
(P117)/
Available recording time
(P31)
• [9999] is displayed if there are 10000 or more
recordable pictures remaining.
• If the remaining available recording time is
29 minutes and 59 seconds, it will be
displayed as [29:59].
7
Card slot (P29)
8
Battery indication (P22)
9
Quality (P187)
:
Picture size (P186)
• This is not displayed when recording in [High
Resolution Mode].
;
Exposure compensation value (P107)/
Exposure Bracket
(P142)
• The status LCD displays an exposure
compensation value ranging between j3 EV
and i3 EV. Values outside this range are
displayed as [ ]/[ ].
12. Others
320
∫ Battery level indicator
A This indicates the power supply source.
B The battery level of the battery in the camera
C The battery level of the battery in the battery grip
• The battery level icon for the battery in the camera is not displayed when a AC adaptor
(optional) is used.
• Recording information is not displayed on the status LCD while an image is being played back
or a menu screen is being displayed.
321
12. Others
Message Display
Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen in some cases.
The major messages are described below as examples.
[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]
• This feature can only be used with pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
Perform formatting
(P31) on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC, etc.
[Cannot be set on this picture]
• [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], etc. cannot be set for pictures not based on the DCF standard.
[Memory Card Error
Format this card?]
• It is a format that cannot be used with this unit.
– Insert a different card.
– Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc.
(P31)
Data will be deleted.
[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button while lens is
attached.]
• Detach the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button.
(P33)
Turn this unit on again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached correctly.]
• Detach the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and the
camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn this unit on again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.
[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]
• Use a card compatible with this unit.
(P30)
[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]
• An error has occurred accessing the card.
Insert the card again.
• Insert a different card.
[Read Error/Write Error
Please check the card]
• It has failed to read or write data.
Remove the card after turning this unit off. Insert the card again, turn this unit on, and try to
read or write the data again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.
12. Others
322
[Recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the card]
• Depending on the [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion picture, the speed class rating
required for the card differs. 6K/4K photo recording requires a card that meets a particular
speed class rating. Use a card that meets the rating.
(P30)
• If the recording stops even when you are using a card that meets the speed class rating, the
data writing speed is too slow. We recommend making a backup and then format the card
(P31)
.
Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle.
[A folder cannot be created]
• A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used.
Format the card on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC etc.
(P31)
If you execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu after formatting, the folder number is reset to
100.
(P230)
[This battery cannot be used]
• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. If this message is displayed even when a genuine
Panasonic battery is used, contact the dealer or Panasonic.
• If the battery terminal is dirty, clean it and remove any objects.
[Failed to connect wireless access point]/[Connection failed]/[No destination
found]
• The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong.
Check the authentication type and encryption key.
(P287)
• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point.
Check the status of other devices that are connected to the wireless access point as well as
the status of other wireless devices.
[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.]/[Network disconnected. Transfer
stopped.]
• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak.
Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.
• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after
specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.
[Connection failed]
• Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.
323
12. Others
Troubleshooting
First, try out the following procedures (P323 to P331).
The sound is caused by the In-Body Image Stabilizer. This is not a malfunction.
• When the ambient temperature is high or continuous recording is performed, the camera’s
temperature will rise. After [ ] is displayed, recording may stop or the functions below may be
temporarily disabled to protect the camera. Wait until the camera cools down.
– [6K/4K PHOTO]
– [Post Focus]
– [Motion Picture]
– [AF-Point Scope]
– HDMI output
– Power supply via the USB connection cable
• The battery is exhausted. Charge the battery. (P21)
• [Economy] is enabled. (P223)
• When [6K/4K Pre-Burst] or [Pre-Burst Recording] is set, the battery drains faster.
> Use these functions only when recording with them.
• Is a Wi-Fi connection being used for a long period of time?
The battery can become flat quickly when connected to Wi-Fi.
> Turn the camera off frequently by using the [Economy] etc.
(P223)
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [Reset] (P231) on
the [Setup] menu.
When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the camera.
Recording stops before finishing. Cannot record. Cannot use some functions.
Battery and power source
The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on.
The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on.
This unit is turned off automatically.
The battery becomes flat too quickly.
12. Others
324
• Is [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] menu set to [FOCUS]? (P209)
You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus.
• Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or similar.
> If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
> Refer to
P333 when the image sensor gets dirty.
• Is the AE Lock
(P106) applied incorrectly?
• Check the drive mode setting.
(P114)
• Are you using the bracket function? (P141)
• The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera.
• Is [Shutter AF] in the [Custom] menu set to [OFF]?
(P207)
• Is [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] menu set to [RELEASE]? (P209)
• Is the AF Lock (P106) applied incorrectly?
• The shutter speed will become slower and the Image Stabilizer function may not work properly
when taking pictures especially in dark places.
> We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer when taking pictures with a slow shutter
speed.
• Try the following:
> Decrease the ISO sensitivity.
(P109)
> Increase the setting for [Noise Reduction] in [Photo Style] or lower the setting for each of
the items other than [Noise Reduction].
(P189)
> Set the [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (P195)
Recording
Taking pictures is not possible.
The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed.
The recorded picture is whitish.
The recorded picture is too bright or dark.
Multiple pictures are taken at one time.
The subject is not focused properly.
The recorded picture is blurred.
The Image Stabilizer is not effective.
The recorded picture looks rough.
Noise appears on the picture.
325
12. Others
• If you record a moving subject when using the electronic shutter or recording motion picture or
a 6K/4K photo, the subject may appear distorted on the picture. This is characteristic of MOS
sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. This is not a malfunction.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s
pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• When using the electronic shutter
(P199), lowering the shutter speed
may reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.
• If noticeable flicker or striping is seen under lighting such as a
fluorescent or LED lighting fixture when recording motion pictures, set [Flkr Decrease]
(P203).
It can reduce the flicker or striping by allowing you to set a fixed shutter speed.
You can set the shutter speed manually in the Creative Video Mode.
(P171)
• Stripes may appear in high ISO sensitivity or depending on the lens you use.
> Decrease the ISO sensitivity.
(P109)
• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture, etc., increasing the shutter speed
may introduce slight changes to brightness and color. These are a result of the characteristics
of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting,
LED lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting, etc., the colors and screen brightness may
change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.
• There may be defective pixels in the image sensor.
> Perform [Pixel Refresh]
(P231).
• At the time of purchase, [Silent Mode] is assigned to the function lever. If the function lever is
set to [MODE2], change the setting to [MODE1].
(P48)
The subject appears distorted on the picture.
Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and
LED lighting fixture.
Stripes appear in high ISO sensitivity.
The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual
scene.
Bright spot not in subject is recorded.
Cannot set [Silent Mode] to [OFF].
12. Others
326
• You may not be able to record for a short while after turning this unit on when using a large
capacity card.
• Depending on the [Rec Format] and [Rec Quality] of a motion picture, the speed class rating
required for the card differs. Use a card that meets the rating.
(P30)
• With recording in a quiet environment, depending on the lenses used, the sound of aperture
and focus actions may be recorded in motion pictures.
Focus operation can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF]
(P167).
• While recording motion pictures, plugging the aperture of the microphone with a finger may
reduce the level of audio recording or audio may not record at all. Also be careful because the
operation sound of lenses can easily be recorded at this time.
• We recommend recording in Creative Video Mode if you are concerned about operational
sounds.
(P172)
• When the electronic shutter is used, the flash is not activated. (P199)
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], the flash is not activated. (P198)
Motion pictures
Recording motion pictures is not possible.
Motion picture recording stops in the middle.
In motion pictures, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.
The recorded sound is very quiet.
An operation sound is recorded in a motion picture.
Flash
The flash is not activated.
327
12. Others
• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto LVF/Monitor Off] (P223) is
activated, and the Monitor/Viewfinder turns off.
• When an object or your hand is positioned near the eye sensor, the Monitor display may switch
to the Viewfinder display.
• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, or when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.
• It is only displayed on the monitor when the camera is connected to a PC or printer.
• Viewfinder of this unit adopts OLED. Screen burn-in may occur on the screen/viewfinder when
a same image is displayed for a long period of time, but it does not affect the recorded images.
• Being a characteristic of the viewfinder of this unit, this phenomenon is not a problem.
Recorded images are not affected.
• Is the card inserted?
• Is this a folder or picture which was processed in the PC?
If it is, it cannot be played back by this unit.
> It is recommended to use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to write pictures from PC to
card.
• Has [Playback Mode] been set for playback?
> Change to [Normal Play].
(P235)
• When Red-Eye Removal ([ ] or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be corrected to black.
> We recommend recording images with Flash Mode set to [‰] or [Red-Eye Removal] set to
[OFF].
(P194)
Monitor/Viewfinder
The Monitor/Viewfinder turns off although the camera is turned on.
It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change
significantly for an instant.
Monitor and viewfinder do not switch when [LVF] is pressed.
Unevenly bright parts or irregular colors appear on the Viewfinder.
The color tone of the viewfinder differs from the actual tone.
Playback
The picture is not played back.
There are no recorded pictures.
Red part of the recorded image has changed color to black.
12. Others
328
∫ General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency
operated nearby?
> Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away
from the device.
• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or
the connection may be disrupted.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely affected. In
such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection. Move the camera away from the
metal surface.
∫ About a wireless access point
• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.
• Check the radio wave condition of the wireless access point.
> Move this unit closer to the wireless access point.
> Change the location and orientation of the wireless access point.
• It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access
point.
> Turn off and on the wireless access point.
> Check the settings of the wireless access point.
> When the network SSID of the wireless access point is set not to broadcast, the wireless
access point may not be detected. Enter the network SSID to start the connection
(P287) or
enable the SSID broadcast of the wireless access point.
• From the Wi-Fi setting menu on the smartphone, turn off and then on the Wi-Fi function.
• Some OS versions, including Windows 8, use two types of accounts: a local account and a
Microsoft account.
Be sure to use the user name and password for the local account.
Wi-Fi function
A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.
Radio waves get disconnected.
Wireless access point is not displayed.
This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.
When I try to set up a Wi-Fi connection with a Windows 8 PC, my user name and
password are not recognized, so I cannot connect to the PC.
329
12. Others
• The default workgroup name is set to “WORKGROUP”. If you changed the workgroup name,
the PC will not be recognized.
In [PC Connection] of the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, change the workgroup name to that of the PC
you are connecting to.
(P291)
• Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.
• When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely
from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.
> Please confirm [Clock Set] and [World Time] of the camera matches with time, date and
time zone in Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely,
please match them.
• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.
• Is the size of the image too large?
> Reduce the image size at [Size]
(P272), and then send.
> Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide]
(P247).
• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.
> Transmit closer to the wireless access point.
• File format of the motion picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination.
(P271)
• Execute the [Reset Network Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (P231)
However, all the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu and [Bluetooth] menu will
be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])
The PC is not recognized when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The camera cannot be
connected to PC via Wi-Fi connection.
Images cannot be transmitted to the web service.
It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.
Transmission of the image fails midway. Some images cannot be transmitted.
I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.
12. Others
330
• Is the camera connected to the TV correctly? (P294)
> Set the TV input to external input mode.
• Is the [VIERA Link] on this unit set to [ON]?
(P227)
> Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
> Turn this unit off and on.
• Set to [PC(Storage)] in [USB Mode].
(P226)
• Turn this unit off and on.
• Check if your PC is compatible with SDXC memory cards.
• A message prompting to format the card may be displayed when connecting, but do not format.
• If the [Access] displayed on the monitor does not disappear, disconnect the USB connection
cable after turning this unit off.
• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.
• Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB Mode].
(P226)
• When using a printer with a Cropping or borderless printing function, cancel this function before
printing.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions for the printer.)
• When you order photo studios to print pictures, ask the photo studio if the 16:9 pictures can be
printed.
TV, PC and printer
The picture does not appear on the television.
VIERA Link does not work.
Cannot communicate with the PC.
The card is not recognized by the PC.
(SDXC memory card is used.)
The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer.
The ends of the pictures are cut at printing.
331
12. Others
• Depending on the lens you attach, it may move inside and create a sound. This is not a
malfunction.
• This is the noise of the Dust Reduction Function working
(P333); it is not a malfunction.
• It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when this unit is turned on or off, and it is
not a malfunction.
• The sound, which is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture, is heard when the
brightness has changed due to, for example, zooming or the movement of the camera. This is
not a malfunction.
• Press [MENU/SET], select the [Setup] menu icon [ ] and then select the [~] icon to set the
desired language.
(P227)
• In dark places, the AF Assist Lamp (P208) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.
• The surface of the camera and the reverse side of the monitor may become warm during use.
This does not affect the performance or quality of the camera.
• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.
> [Please set the clock] message will be displayed; please reset the clock.
(P38)
Others
When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the attached lens.
The camera makes a noise when this unit is turned on.
There is a sound from lens unit.
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
The camera becomes warm.
The clock is reset.
12. Others
332
Cautions for Use
Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be
disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting
the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields
created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures and/or
sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly,
turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then reinsert the battery or
reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.
Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/or sound
may be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables.
If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the
surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period
of time.
Optimal use of the camera
333
12. Others
• It may cause injury to the skin if you directly touch the metal parts of the unit in places
where temperature is very low (environments under 0 oC (32 oF), such as ski resorts or
places at high altitude) for a long period of time.
Use gloves or similar when using it for long periods.
• The performance of the battery (number of recordable pictures/operating time) may decrease
temporarily when using in a temperature between s10 oC and 0 oC (14 oF and 32 oF) (cold
places such as ski resorts or places at high altitude).
• The battery cannot be recharged in a temperature less than 0 oC (32 oF). (The [CHARGE]
indicator blinks when the battery cannot be recharged.)
• If the camera is used in cold places such as ski resorts or places at high altitude with snow or
water droplets adhered to the camera, some parts of the camera may become hard to move or
the sound may become dim with snow or water droplets freezing in the gap of the camera on/
off switch, speakers, and microphone. This is not a malfunction.
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC coupler (optional), or
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry, soft
cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,
and then with a dry cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the
camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
∫ About dirt on the image sensor
This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera
body when changing lenses. Depending on the recording conditions, dirt on the image
sensor may appear on the recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid changing the lens in
a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
When using in a cold climate or at low temperatures
Cleaning
Dust reduction function
This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have
affixed to the front of the imaging device.
This function will function automatically when the camera is turned on, but if you see
dust, perform the [Sensor Cleaning] in the [Setup] menu.
12. Others
334
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when
you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower
brush. Be careful not to blow too strongly.
• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.
• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or Panasonic.
∫ For care of the viewfinder/Eye cup
• Before you remove stains on the viewfinder and
eye cup or start other types of cleaning, remove
the eye cup (
1
). Blow away the dust on the
viewfinder surface with a blower (commercially
available), and wipe the surface lightly with a dry,
soft cloth. Attach the eye cup after the cleaning
(
2
).
• Be careful not to lose the eye cup.
• Keep the eye cup out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
• Do not press the monitor with excessive force. Uneven colors may appear on the monitor and it
may malfunction.
• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the Monitor/Viewfinder will be slightly
darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal
temperature of the camera increases.
About the Monitor/Viewfinder
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the Monitor/
Viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or
green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. Though the Monitor/Viewfinder
screen parts are produced with highly controlled precision technology, some
pixels may be inactive or always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures
on a card.
335
12. Others
• Do not press the lens with excessive force.
• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it
to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window.
• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the picture may be
affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before and after taking pictures.
• To prevent dust and other particles from accumulating on or entering
the lens, attach the lens rear cap when the lens is not in use.
• To protect the lens contact points A, do not place the lens with its
mount surface facing down. In addition, do not allow the lens contact
points to become dirty.
• To improve the dust- and splash-proof performance, the mount of the
interchangeable lens (H-ES12060/H-FS12060) is embedded with the
lens mount rubber. If you change the lens repeatedly, friction with the lens mount rubber may
leave scratches on the camera’s mount. However, those scratches do not affect the
performance of this unit. For the replacement of the lens mount rubber, contact Panasonic.
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. Its ability to generate power comes
from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it. This reaction is susceptible to
the surrounding temperature and humidity. If the temperature is too high or too low,
the operating time of the battery will become shorter.
Always remove the battery after use.
• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, and store or keep away from metallic objects (clips,
etc.).
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the
terminals are damaged.
• Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera.
Bring charged spare batteries when going out.
• Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions
such as at a ski resort.
• When you travel, do not forget to bring the battery charger (supplied), AC adaptor (supplied)
and the USB connection cable (for charger) so that you can charge the battery in the country
that you are traveling in.
Dispose of unusable battery.
• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
• The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling laws. Call the
RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as
necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a
battery.
About the Lens
Battery
12. Others
336
• The [CHARGE] indicator may blink under the influence of static electricity or electromagnetic
wave. This phenomenon has no effects on charging.
• If you use the AC adaptor (supplied) near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the AC adaptor (supplied) 1 m (3.3 feet) or further away from radios.
• The AC adaptor (supplied) may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a
malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
• Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean.
Do not leave the card where the temperature is high, where electromagnetic waves
or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not bend or drop the card.
• The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the
card.
• Do not allow dirt, dust, or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not
touch the terminals with your fingers.
Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card
Format or delete using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, it will not erase the data in the memory card completely.
It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially
available computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the
memory card before transferring to another party or disposing.
Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user.
About the Charger/AC adaptor (supplied)
Card
337
12. Others
If a name or birthday is set for [Profile Setup]/Face Recognition function, this personal
information is kept in the camera and recorded in the image.
We recommend that you enable [Wi-Fi Password] and [Wi-Fi Function Lock] to protect
personal information.
(P291 , 292)
Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous
operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage
from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.
When requesting a repair, transferring to another party, or disposing.
• After making a copy of personal information, always delete information such as personal
information and wireless LAN connection settings that you have saved within the camera with
[Reset Network Settings]/[Delete account]
(P231, 284).
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information.
(P231)
• Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above operations
are not possible due to malfunction.
When transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card, please refer to
“Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card”.
(P336)
When uploading images on web services
• Images may contain information that can be used for identifying individuals such as titles,
recording dates, and location information. When uploading images on web services, check
carefully, and then upload.
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature: (Recommended
temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF), Recommended humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH)
• Always remove the battery and the card from the camera.
• If the battery is left inserted in the camera, it will discharge even if the camera is turned off. If
the battery continues to be left in the camera, it will discharge excessively and may become
unusable even if charged.
• When storing the battery for a long period of time, we recommend charging it once a year.
Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or
a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long period
of time.
About the personal information
When not using the camera for a long period of time
12. Others
338
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate
handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.
• When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it.
• You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.
• Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching
the camera. You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when
turning it. Also, the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the
camera is attached too tightly to the tripod or unipod.
• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with the
pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in
contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens. Therefore it is recommended to
attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional) before mounting on the tripod/unipod.
• Read the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod carefully.
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg/35.3 oz) to the camera body,
do not carry the camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
About the picture data
About tripods or unipods
About the shoulder strap
339
12. Others
∫ Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs
and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any
damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN
device.
∫ Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this
camera is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radio wave regulations if used in countries
other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any
violations.
∫ There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.
∫ Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as
near microwave ovens. These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the
2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.
∫ Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to use
When the camera utilizes its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched
automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorized to use
(SSID
¢
) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be
considered as unauthorized access.
¢ SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If
the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.
Wi-Fi function
340
12. Others
• G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital camera
system of LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds System
standard.
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation,
in Japan, the United States, the European Union and other
countries.
• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Olympus Corporation, in Japan, the
United States, the European Union and other countries.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
• “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive”
logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
• Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• iMovie, Mac, OS X and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
• iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of
Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Logo is a certification
mark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
•“Wi-Fi
®
” is a registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are
trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
• DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the
Digital Living Network Alliance.
• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware
Corporation. DynaFont is a registered trademark of
DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE
INCORPORATED.
• Other names of systems and products mentioned in
these instructions are usually the registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers
who developed the system or product concerned.
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a
consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com
